Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (114 trang)

Giáo án tiếng anh lớp 6 theo mẫu mới có hình ảnh

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (2.37 MB, 114 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>



Week: 1Week: 1 <sub>Date of preparation:August 20th ,2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:August 20th ,2017</sub>




Period: 1 Date of teaching : August 21st ,2017Period: 1 Date of teaching : August 21st ,2017


GIỚI THIỆU MÔN HỌC - CÁCH HỌC



GIỚI THIỆU MÔN HỌC - CÁCH HỌC



<b>I/ Mục tiêu</b>
<b>I/ Mục tiêu :: </b>


- Giúp HS hiểu được môn Tiếng Anh là một ngôn ngữ mà các em sẽ được học kĩ hơn, và là
- Giúp HS hiểu được môn Tiếng Anh là một ngôn ngữ mà các em sẽ được học kĩ hơn, và là
một mơn học chính thức ở bậc THCS.


một mơn học chính thức ở bậc THCS.


- Giúp HS có cách học môn Tiếng Anh một cách đúng nhất và hợp lí nhất.
- Giúp HS có cách học mơn Tiếng Anh một cách đúng nhất và hợp lí nhất.
- Qui định với các em về sách, vở và các đồ dùng để học môn Tiếng Anh.
- Qui định với các em về sách, vở và các đồ dùng để học môn Tiếng Anh.
<b>II/ Giới thiệu môn học:</b>


<b>II/ Giới thiệu môn học:</b>


<i>1. Cơ sở</i>



<i>1. Cơ sở:</i>:


Môn Tiếng Anh được xây dựng trên cơ sở:
Môn Tiếng Anh được xây dựng trên cơ sở:


-Mục tiêu của bậc THCS do Bộ GD-ĐT qui định.
-Mục tiêu của bậc THCS do Bộ GD-ĐT qui định.


-Vị trí của môn học đối với sự phát triển chung của tồn xã hội. Là cơng cụ tạo điều kiện hịa
-Vị trí của mơn học đối với sự phát triển chung của tồn xã hội. Là cơng cụ tạo điều kiện hòa
nhập với cộng đồng quốc tế và khu vực, tiếp cận với những thông tin quốc tế về khoa học-kĩ
nhập với cộng đồng quốc tế và khu vực, tiếp cận với những thông tin quốc tế về khoa học-kĩ
thuật, tiếp cận với những nền văn hóa trên thế giới.


thuật, tiếp cận với những nền văn hóa trên thế giới.


<i>2. Mục tiêu cụ thể:</i>


<i>2. Mục tiêu cụ thể:</i>


Học xong bậc THCS các em có thể đạt được những yêu cầu sau:
Học xong bậc THCS các em có thể đạt được những yêu cầu sau:


-Nắm được kiến thức cơ bản, tối thiểu và tương đối hệ thống về Tiếng Anh thực hành hiện
-Nắm được kiến thức cơ bản, tối thiểu và tương đối hệ thống về Tiếng Anh thực hành hiện
đại, phù hợp với lứa tuổi.


đại, phù hợp với lứa tuổi.


-Có kĩ năng cơ bản về sử dụng Tiếng Anh như một công cụ giao tiếp đơn giản dưới các dạng


-Có kĩ năng cơ bản về sử dụng Tiếng Anh như một công cụ giao tiếp đơn giản dưới các dạng
nghe-nói -đọc-viết.


nghe-nói -đọc-viết.


-Hình thành kĩ năng học Tiếng Anh và phát triển tư duy. Những khả năng này sẽ có tác động
-Hình thành kĩ năng học Tiếng Anh và phát triển tư duy. Những khả năng này sẽ có tác động
đến khả năng sử dụng tiếng mẹ đẻ và sẽ đem lại cho các em năng lực ngơn ngữ tồn diện hơn.
đến khả năng sử dụng tiếng mẹ đẻ và sẽ đem lại cho các em năng lực ngơn ngữ tồn diện hơn.
<b>III/ Cách học:</b>


<b>III/ Cách học:</b>


<i>1. Kỷ năng</i>


<i>1. Kỷ năng:</i>:


Vận dụng 4 kỹ năng: NGHE - NÓI - ĐỌC - VIẾTVận dụng 4 kỹ năng: NGHE - NÓI - ĐỌC - VIẾT


<i>2. Phương tiện</i>


<i>2. Phương tiện:</i>:


- SGK T.A 6, Sách BT, vở ghi.
- SGK T.A 6, Sách BT, vở ghi.
- Băng ghi âm, máy nghe
- Băng ghi âm, máy nghe
- Tranh ảnh...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

Week: 1


Week: 1


Date of preparation:August 21st ,2017


Date of preparation:August 21st ,2017


Period: 2 Date of teaching : August 22nd ,2017


Period: 2 Date of teaching : August 22nd ,2017


Unit 1 : GREETINGS


<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2,3,4</b>
<b> Lesson 2: A5,6,7,8</b>
<b> Lesson 3: B1,2,3,4</b>
<b> Lesson 4: C1,2,3,4</b>


<b> </b>

<b></b>



<b>---Lesson 1: HELLO (</b><i><b>A1-2-3-4</b></i><b> )</b>
<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to greet each other and identify oneself.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Hello/Hi.



I am Lan/ My name is Lan.


b. Vocabulary: Hello , Hi , I ,I am=I’m, my , name,is,am .(My name is...)
<b>III/ TT echniques: echniques: groupwork, pairwork, individual work.</b>groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<b>IV/Teaching aids : </b> textbook, cassette, pictures, colored chalks.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
+ Sets the situation :


T: Các em thường làm gì khi gặp nhau ?
Ss: Chúng em chào nhau.


T: Các em nói thế nào khi chào nhau ?
Ss “ Xin chào “


T: Các em làm gì khi làm quen nhau ?
Ss: Chúng em giới thiệu tên mình.


T: Các em giới thiệu như thế nào ?
Ss: Tôi là/Tên tôi là …


<i> +Tells what is going on in the lesson :</i>
greeting each other and introduce oneself.


<i><b>II_NEW LESSON</b></i> :



<i><b>Activity1:</b></i>


T : teach vocabulary :
Read the new words .
Ss :Listen and repeat


T : Write the new words on the board
Ss :Write them down


Read individually
T : Read and ask sts to reepeat
Ss : work in pairs


<b> 1.</b><i><b>Warm up</b></i><b>:</b>





<b>A1: </b><i><b>Listen and repeat</b></i>


_Hello / Hi : Xin chào ( situation )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<i><b>Activity2</b></i>:<i><b> </b></i>


T : Ask Ss to say Hello / Hi to their
classmates


Ss : work in pairs



<i><b>Activity3</b></i>:<i><b> </b></i>


T : Ask sts to play the role of Lan, Nga, Ba,
Nam to read the sentences to introduce their
name .


Ss : read


<i><b>Activity4:</b></i>


T : ask sts to introdure their name to the class
Ss : work in group


<i><b>III . CONSOLIDATION:</b></i>


T: Asks Ss to write in order to introduce their
name.


Ss : work in pairs


T : Asks Ss to match A with B
Ss : match


T : Ask sts to fill in each blank with one
suitable word


Ss : Work in group.


<i><b>IV : HOMEWORK</b><b> </b>:</i>



T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


<b>A2: </b><i><b>Practice:</b></i>


S1: Hello
S2 :Hello
S3 :Hi
S4 :Hi
/ Notes:


<i>Chào thân mật </i><sub></sub> Hello / Hi + teân


<i><b>A3: Listen and repeat</b></i>


I am Lan
I am Nga
My name is Ba
My name is Nam


<i><b>Cách giới thiệu tên mình</b></i><sub></sub>


I am/ I’m + tên mình


= My name is / My name’s + tên mình
I : tôi ( situation + example )


my : của tôi ( situation + example)
name :tên (situation + example)


am=’mam=’m , , is =’sis =’s : là,thì : là,thì<i> (</i>(<i>situation + example) situation + example</i>)



<i>I</i>


<i>I </i> am/I‘mam/I‘m <i>LanLan: </i>: <i>Tôi là Lan = Tôi là Lan</i> =


<i>My name</i>


<i>My name </i> is / My name’sis / My name’s <i>Lan : tên của tôi làLan</i> : tên của tôi là
Lan


Lan


<i><b>A4: Practice with a group:</b></i>


I am ………


My name is ………My name is ………
A B


1) I am Minh . a) Xin chào.
2)Hello b) Tên của tôi là Minh.
3) My name is Minh c) Tôi là Minh
1) I ____________ Hoa .


2) _________ , Trang .


3) My name __________ Phong .


 <b>Homework:</b>



- Learn the lesson carefully.




-- Do exercises 1,2 in workbook.
VI. Comment


VI. Comment


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Week: 1


Week: 1 <sub>Date of preparation:August 22nd ,2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:August 22nd ,2017</sub>


Period: 3 Date of teaching : August 23th ,2017
Period: 3 Date of teaching : August 23th ,2017




Unit 1 : GREETINGS
Lesson 2: HELLO (<i><b>A5,6,7,8</b></i><b> ) </b>
<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask for and say the health .
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : How are you ? _ I’m fine , thanks. And you ?
b. Vocabulary: how , you , are, And you? fine , thanks, Miss, Mr.
<b>III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work.</b>pairwork, individual work.



<b>IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, pictures, colored chalks.</b>
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>




Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
<b>I_ </b><i><b>WARM UP</b>: </i>


WORK GAME


T: Explain the game and give the clue
Ss: Listen end guess the word


T: Give the questions ( in vietnamese )
Ss: Answer ( in vietnamese)


T: Lead to new lesson.
<b>II</b><i><b>_ NEW LESSON</b> :</i>


<i><b>Activity1:</b></i>


T: -teach vocabulary :


Read the vo 3 times ,then ask sts to
repeat .


Ss: Listen and repeat



T: Call on some sts to read again
Ss: Read individually


Ss: Coppy down


T: -Vocabulary checking : ( matching )
T: Presents the structures:.


T: -Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue..
- Ask Ss to listen and repeat each
sentence .


Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
Ss: Pair work


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to role-play in front of the
class.


* Instruction:” Các em sẽ đốn từ.Từ này có 5
<i>kí tự. Các em thường dùng từ này để chào khi </i>
<i>gặp nhau”</i>





H E L L O



- Các em thường nói gì sau khi chào nhau ?
- Hỏi thăm sức khỏe.




<i><b>A5: Listen and repeat</b></i>


_how : thế nào ( situation + example )
_ are: là , thì ( situation + example )
_ and : và , còn (translation )


_ you : bạn , mày ( situation + example )
_ fine: khỏe( translation )


_ thanks = thank you: cảm ơn ( translation)
<i> _How are you?:Bạn có khỏe khơng? </i>


_I’m fine,thanks =Fine, thank you :Tôi
<i>khỏe,cảm ơn:</i>


Notes: Hỏi thăm sức khỏe: <sub></sub> How are you ?
Nói sức khỏe <sub></sub> I’m fine , thanks


Ba: Hi, Lan .
Lan: Hello , Ba .
Ba: How are you ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Ss: Role play of Ba and lan.
T: Correct if any.



<i><b>Activity2:</b></i>


T: Ask sts to work in pairs , play the role
of


Miss Hoa and Mr Hung ; Nam and Lan
to


make the similar dialogues
Ss: Work in pairs


T: Call on some pairs to perform in front
of


the class


Ss: Open pair work


<i><b>Activity3:</b></i>


T: Ask sts to work in pairs to complete
the dialogue between Nam and Lan .
Ss: Pairwork


T: Call on some pairs to perform in front
of


the class



Ss: Open pairwork


T: Ask sts to write the dialogue on their
notebook


Ss: Write


<i><b>Activity 4:</b></i>


T: Review.


<b>III_ </b><i><b>CONSOLIDATION</b><b> </b> :</i>


T: Asks Sts to put the sentences into a
dialogue.


Ss: Pairwork
T: Asks Ss to complete the open
dialogue.


Ss: Individually


<b>IV_ </b><i><b>HOMEWORK:</b></i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


<i><b>A6: Practice with a partner</b></i>


Miss: Cô (chưa lập gđ)


Mr: ông, thầy.


Miss Hoa: ………
Mr Hung: ………
Nam: ……….
Lan: ………..


<i><b>A7: Write in your exercise book </b></i>




Nam: Hello, Lan. How are you?
Lan: Hi, I’m fine, thanks.




<i><b>A8/ Remember</b><b> </b></i>:
Hello/Hi.


My name is... / I am ...


How are you? I’m fine, thanks.
I am =I’m


_ How are you?
_ Hello, Phong.
_ Fine , thanks.
_ Hi, Thu.



_ I’m fine, thanks. And you ?
_ Hello, Minh.


_ _____, Dung.


_ __________________ ?
_ I’m fine, thanks. And you ?
_ _____ , thanks.


<b>*Homework:</b>


- Learn the lesson carefully .
- Do exercises 3,4 in workbook.
- Prepare B1,2,3,4,5,6 for next period


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

**************************************************************************


Week: 2


Week: 2 <sub>Date of preparation:August 27th ,2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:August 27th ,2017</sub>


Period: 4 Date of teaching : August 28th ,2017
Period: 4 Date of teaching : August 28th ,2017




Unit 1 : GREETINGS
Lesson 3: HELLO (B1,2,3,4 )
I/ Objectives:



By the end of the lesson,students will be able to greet people in other ways .
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : expressions used to greet people and to say goodbye.


b. Vocabulary: Good morning , Good afternoon , Good evening , Goodbye / Bye , Good
night, we are,


we’re, we are childrend.
III/ TT echniques echniques<b>: </b> <b>: </b> <b> pairwork, individual work.</b>pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, pictures, colored chalks.
V/ Procedures :


Teacher ’s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
I_WARM UP:


T: Call some pairs of sts go to
the board, then ask them to make
dialogues:to greet, to introduce
their names, to ask how they are
and to say thank you.


Sts: Do as T’s ask.


T: Correct if any and give marks.
II_NEW LESSON:



Activity1:


T: -teach vocabulary :
Ss: Listen and repeat
Ss: Copy down


<i>Ex: A: Hi/Hello. I’m...A...</i>
B: Hi/Hello. I’m...B...
A: How are you?


B: I’m fine, thank you. And you?
A: Fine, thanks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

T:


T: Vo checking : ( matching )
T: Presents the structures:


T: Give example and explain the
structures


Activity2:


T: Ask Ss to practice
speaking .


Ss: Pair work
Activity3:


T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the


dialogue..


Ask Ss to listen and repeat
each sentence .


Ss: Repeat in chorus
T: Ask Ss to practice
speaking .


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to role-play in front
of the class.


Ss: Role play of Miss Hoa and
children ; Mom and Lan


Activity4:


T: Ask sts to work in pairs to
complete the dialogue between
Lan and Nga


Ss: Pairwork


T: Call on some pairs to perform
in front of the class


Ss: Open pairwork



T: Ask sts to write the dialogue
on their notebook.


Ss: Write


III_ CONSOLIDATION :


T: Ask Ss to complete the open
dialogue .


Ss:Pair work .


_Good morning / afternoon / evening:Xin chào


_Good bye = Bye: Tạm biệt
_Good night: Chúc ngủ ngon


_ We’re fine , thank you ; Chúng em khỏe, cảm ơn cô .
Notes: _ Chào người lớn tuổi


Goodmorning/afternoon/evening,Mr/Mrs/Miss+tên
Goodmorning/afternoon/evening,Mr/Mrs/Miss+tên
B2: Practice with a partner


Good morning
Good afternoon
Good evening
Good night


B3: Listen and repeat



a) Miss Hoa: Good morning, children.
Children: Good morning, Miss Hoa .
Miss Hoa: How are you ?


Children: We’re fine,thank you.
How are you ?
Miss Hoa: Fine,thanks.
Good bye
Children: Bye


B4: write


Lan: Good afternoon, Nga .


Nga: ……… , ……. .
Lan: How are you ?


Nga: ………. , ……….. .
Lan: ……….. ?


Nga: Fine,thanks .
Lan: Good bye
Nga: ... .


Trinh : Good afternoon, Miss Loan.


Miss Loan: ……….. , Trinh.
Trinh : ………..?



Miss Loan : I’m fine, ………. . And you?
Trinh : Fine , thanks. ……… .


Miss Loan : Bye


<i>-Em chào nhau như thế nào khi gặp nhau vào buổi sáng/</i>
<i>chiều/ tối?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

T: Give some questions to check
sts’understanding.


IV_ HOMEWORK :


T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


*Homework:


- Learn the lesson carefully.


- Do exercises: 1,2,3 in workbook.
- Prepare part C1,2 for next lesson.


VI. Comment
VI. Comment


**********************************


Week: 2



Week: 2 <sub>Date of preparation:August 28th ,2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:August 28th ,2017</sub>


Period:5 Date of teaching : August 29th ,2017
Period:5 Date of teaching : August 29th ,2017




Unit 1 : GREETINGS


Lesson 4: How old are you? (C1,2,3,4 )
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to count number from 1 to 20.
Students will be able to introduce oneself and others, say how old one is.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : one and two is three, three minus two is one.


This is This is ... ... _ _ How old are you ? _ I’m .... .How old are you ? _ I’m .... .


b. Vocabulary: numbers from 1 to 20, and minus.this is, how old, years old
III/ TT echniques echniques<b>: </b> <b>: </b> <b> pairwork, individual work.groupwork</b>pairwork, individual work.groupwork


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, numbers, colored chalks.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


I_WARM UP:


T: Ask Ss to distinguish the significance of
series of figures below


Ss: Listen


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
cardinal numbers from 1 to 20.


II_NEW LESSON :
Activity 1:


837 124 ( telephone number ) 469 Le Loi
Qui Nhon ( address )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

T: _teach vocabulary : one _ twenty
( figures )


<i> 2_Vocabulary checking : </i>
(slap the board)


Activity 2:


T: Ask sts to practice counting from one to
twenty with a partner in many ways. Maybe:


-count in turn from 1 to 20: 1,2,3,...20


-count event numbers: 2,4,6,8,...20



-count odd numbers: 1,3,5,7...19


Ss: Pair work
Free practice: T.ues flash cards and ask sts to
read aloud the numbers in it.
Activity 3:
T:
T: <i>-teach vocabulary : -teach vocabulary :</i>
<i> </i>
<i> -Presents the structures:-Presents the structures:</i>
. T: -Ask Ss to Ss listen to the dialogue..
- Ask Ss to listen and repeat each
sentence .
Ss: Repeat in chorus
T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
Ss: groupwork.
Activity 4:
T: Ask sts to ask for their classmates’ age .
Ss: Work in pairs.
T: Have some pairs practice aloud.
III_CONSOLIDATION :
T: Ask Ss to say the following numbers :
Ss: Whole class
Ss: Whole class
T: Ask Ss to listen and cross the numbers
T: Ask Ss to listen and cross the numbers
1 : one 11 : eleven
2 : two 12 : twelve
3 : three 13 : thirteen


4 : four 14 : fourteen
5 : five 15 : fifteen
6 : six 16 : sixteen
7 : seven 17 : seventeen
8 : eight 18 : eighteen
9 : nine 19 : nineteen
10 : ten 20 : twenty
C2:Practice
@ Cross the numbers you hear
3 12 6 9 20 1


<i>13 8 </i>


5 4 15 11 7 2


0 10


C3: Listen and repeat


_this is_this is: đây là : đây là


__How oldHow old : mấy tuổi : mấy tuổi


_years old: tuổi_years old: tuổi


<i>_ </i>



<i>_ This is Lan</i>This is Lan : đây là Lan . : đây là Lan .


_ How old are you ?: Bạn mấy tuổi?
_ I’m eleven : tôi 11 tuổi.


:


: Notes:Notes:


Giới thiệu người hoặc vật khác ở gần mình:Giới thiệu người hoặc vật khác ở gần mình:


<i>This is + NThis is + N</i>




Hỏi tuổi : Hỏi tuổi : How old How old are are youyou ? ?


Nói tuổi Nói tuổi I’m + số đếm. I’m + số đếm.
C4/


C4/ Practice Practice ::




-- How old are you?How old are you?





-- I’m ……… I’m ………




Thu :_ Good morning , Miss Nga.
Thu :_ Good morning , Miss Nga.


Miss Nga :_ ______________, Thu .Miss Nga :_ ______________, Thu .


Thu : _ Miss Nga , _____________ Thu : _ Miss Nga , _____________
Loan .


Loan .


Miss Nga :_ Good morning , Loan . Miss Nga :_ Good morning , Loan .
_______?


_______?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

they hear
they hear
Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to complete the open dialogue.


Ss: pair work


Ss: pair work


IV_ HOME WORK:


T: Remark the lesson and give homework
T: Remark the lesson and give homework .


twelve.
twelve.
*Homework:
*Homework:


- Learn by heart the cardinal numbers from
- Learn by heart the cardinal numbers from
one to twenty.


one to twenty.


-Do exercise 1,2,3,4 in workbook.
-Do exercise 1,2,3,4 in workbook.
-Prepare Unit 2-part A


-Prepare Unit 2-part A
VI. Comment


VI. Comment


********************************************


********************************************
Week: 2


Week: 2 <sub>Date of preparation: 29/08/ 2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 29/08/ 2017</sub>


Period:6 Date of teaching : 31/08/ 2017.
Period:6 Date of teaching : 31/08/ 2017.




Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL
<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2,4</b>
<b> Lesson 2: B1,3</b>
<b> Lesson 3: B4,5,6</b>
<b> Lesson 4: C1</b>
<b> Lesson 5: C2,3,4 </b>



<b> Lesson 1: Come in (A1,2,4 ) </b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to understand and use simple commands in
class.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Come in!, sit down!Come in!, sit down!



b. Vocabulary: come in, sit down, stand up, open your book, close your book.
<b>III/ TT echniquesechniques : </b>: <b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work. </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<b>IV/ Teaching aids :textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures.</b>
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>


<i>I_I_WARM UPWARM UP: : </i>


T:


T: Ask Ss to obey orders ( in actions such Ask Ss to obey orders ( in actions such
as standing up , sitting down , opening the
as standing up , sitting down , opening the
book and closing the book )


book and closing the book )


<i>T: </i>


<i>T: Ask Ss to guess the aim of the lesson </i> Ask Ss to guess the aim of the lesson
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson:
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson:
giving and obeying order.


giving and obeying order.




<i>II_II_NEW LESSONNEW LESSON::</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

T:


T: <i>Teach vocabulary:Teach vocabulary:</i>


Ss: Listen and repeat


T: Call on some sts to read again
Ss: Read individually


Ss: Coppy down


<i>Vocabulary checking :</i>


<i>Vocabulary checking :(</i>(<i>slap the board)slap the board</i>)
T: Give example and explain the structures
Ss : listen and write it down




<i>Activity 2:</i>


<i>Activity 2:</i>


T: Ask sts to look at the pictures and then
T: Ask sts to look at the pictures and then



read the commandsread the commands
Ss: Look at & read
Ss: Look at & read


T: Ask sts to match the commands with the
T: Ask sts to match the commands with the


picturespictures
Ss: pairwork
Ss: pairwork


<i>Activity 3</i>


<i>Activity 3:: </i>


T: Ask Ss to do as T does and to say as T
T: Ask Ss to do as T does and to say as T
says after the sentence


says after the sentence


III_ CONSOLIDATION : :( HOT SEAT)
T:


T: use hands to mime while asking sts read use hands to mime while asking sts read
aloud the word which T is miming.


aloud the word which T is miming.


Sts: Do as T’s ask.


Sts: Do as T’s ask.


T: Correct if it’s necessary.
T: Correct if it’s necessary.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK::</i>


<b>a partner</b>
<b>a partner</b>:<b> </b>:<b> </b>


__Stand upStand up :hãy đứng dậy ( :hãy đứng dậy (<i>actionaction ) </i> )
__Sit downSit down: hãy ngồi xuống : hãy ngồi xuống <i>( action( action )</i> )


__Open your bookOpen your book:hãy mở sách ra (:hãy mở sách ra (<i>action ) actio</i>n )
__Close your book.Close your book.:hãy gấp sách lại (:hãy gấp sách lại (<i>action) action</i>)
__Come inCome in :mời vào ( :mời vào ( <i>actionaction</i> ) )


_


_ positive imperative:positive imperative:


Open Open <i>your book.your book</i>.
<b>A2: </b>


<b>A2: Match and write:Match and write:</b>







Open your book Sit downOpen your book Sit down






Come inCome in





Close your book Stand upClose your book Stand up
<b>A4/ </b>


<b>A4/ Remember:Remember:</b>


Come in. Close your book.
Come in. Close your book.
Sit down. Stand up.


Sit down. Stand up.
Open your book.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

Remark the lesson and give homework.


Remark the lesson and give homework. <b>*Homework:*Homework</b>:


- Learn the commands by heart .
- Learn the commands by heart .
-Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.
-Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.
-Prepare part B1,2 for next lesson.
-Prepare part B1,2 for next lesson.
VI. Comment


VI. Comment


**************************************************************************


Week: 3


Week: 3 <sub>Date of preparation:September 3</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 3</sub>rdrd<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:7 Date of teaching : September 4


Period:7 Date of teaching : September 4thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


<b>Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL </b>


Lesson 2: Where do you live? (B1,3 )
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask and answer about personal informationask and answer about personal information


such as: name, age, address.


II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : -What What is your name ? How old are you?_ is your name ? How old are you?_ WhereWhere do you live ? I live do you live ? I live
on...street.


on...street.


b. Vocabulary: you-your, I-my, where, what, live, street, city, on
IV/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures.
V/ Procedures :


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<i>I</i>


<i>I_WARM UP_WARM UP: :</i> BRAINSTORMBRAINSTORM
T:


T: Ask Ss to tell something about Ask Ss to tell something about


personal information . ( name , age , personal information . ( name , age ,


address , grade , school )address , grade , school )
Ss: Whole class



Ss: Whole class


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


asking for and giving personal asking for and giving personal
information.


information.


<i>II_ </i>


<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>


<i>Activity 1:</i>


<i>T: Teach vocabulary :</i>


<i>T: Teach vocabulary :</i>


- Read the vocabulary 3 times ,then ask
sts to repeat .


Ss: Listen and repeat.


T: Call on some sts to read again
Ss: Read individually





T: Write on the board
Ss: Coppy down


<i>Vocabulary checking : </i>


<i>Vocabulary checking : </i> ( ( <i>matching )matching</i> )


T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the dialogue and
T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the dialogue and
repeat each sentence


repeat each sentence


T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
Ss: Pair work


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to role-play in front of the class. Ask Ss to role-play in front of the class.
Ss: Open pair work


Ss: Open pair work


<i>Activity 2:</i>


<i>Activity 2:</i>



T: Read each letter in the English Alphabet
T: Read each letter in the English Alphabet
and ask sts to repeat.


and ask sts to repeat.
Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Asks Ss to Ss listen and repeat each T: Asks Ss to Ss listen and repeat each


consonant and vowel.consonant and vowel.


Ss: Listen and repeatSs: Listen and repeat
2


2


T: Ask Ss to spell and pronounce the
T: Ask Ss to spell and pronounce the
3


3 following words. following words.


B1:


B1: Listen and repeat . Then practice Listen and repeat . Then practice



the dialogue with a partner the dialogue with a partner
_


_whatwhat : gì , cái gì : gì , cái gì


What’s = what isWhat’s = what is


What is your nameWhat is your name?:tên của bạn là gì ? ?:tên của bạn là gì ?


I am...I am...


My name is...My name is...
_


_ onon ( prep ) : tại ( prep ) : tại
_in (prep): tại
_in (prep): tại
_


_ streetstreet ( n ) : đường phố ( n ) : đường phố
_


_ where :where : ở đâu ở đâu
_


_ livelive ( v ) : sống ( ( v ) : sống ( <i>translationtranslation</i> ) )




Where do you live ? Where do you live ? :bạn sống ở đâu ? :bạn sống ở đâu ?


e.g:I live e.g:I live onon Tran Phu Street Tran Phu Street


in in Qui Nhon Qui Nhon
_house: ngôi nhà


_house: ngôi nhà
_city: thành phố
_city: thành phố


B3:


B3: Listen and repeat .Listen and repeat .
a


a bb cc dd ee ff
g


g hh ii jj kk ll
n


n o


o pp qq rr
s



s tt uu vv ww xx
y


y zz





<i>_ Consonants : </i>


<i>_ Consonants : </i>


<i>b,c,d,f,g,h,j,k,l,m,n,p,q,r,s,t,v,w, </i>


<i>b,c,d,f,g,h,j,k,l,m,n,p,q,r,s,t,v,w, </i>


<i>x,y,z.</i>


<i>x,y,z.</i>


<i>_ </i>


<i>_ Vowels : a, e, i,o,u .Vowels : a, e, i,o,u .</i>




<i>STUDENT FORM</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION : :</i>



T: consolidate new words and some model consolidate new words and some model
sentences.


sentences.


IV: IV: HOME WORK:HOME WORK:


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.




<i>name, how , thanks , what, where, morning,name, how , thanks , what, where, morning,</i>
<i> </i>


<i> afternoon, evening, close, open, elevenafternoon, evening, close, open, eleven</i>


*Homework:
*Homework:


- Learn the new words by heart .
- Learn the new words by heart .
-Do exercises: 3,4 in workbook.
-Do exercises: 3,4 in workbook.
VI. Comment


VI. Comment



**********************************************
**********************************************
Week: 3


Week: 3 <sub>Date of preparation:September 4</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 4</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:8 Date of teaching : September 6


Period:8 Date of teaching : September 6thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


<i> </i>


<i> <b> </b> <b> </b></i><b>Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL </b>


Lesson 3: Where do you live? (B4,5,6 )
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to practice spelling their names.practice spelling their names.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : - How do you spell your name? - It’s B-A,Ba. How do you spell your name? - It’s B-A,Ba.
b. Vocabulary: to spell.


III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures.
V/ Procedures :






Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

I_


I_ WARM UP:WARM UP:
T:


T: Show each letter and asks Show each letter and asks


““ What ‘s this ? “What ‘s this ? “
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


asking someone to spell a word , asking someone to spell a word ,


reviewing question wordsreviewing question words
II_ II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON




ACTIVITY 1 :


11--<i>Pre-teach vocabulary : Pre-teach vocabulary :</i>


T: Teach vocabulary .
T: Teach vocabulary .




T: Call on some sts to read again
Ss: Read individually and copy down.
T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the dialogue..
T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the dialogue..


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence
Ss: Whole class


Ss: Whole class


T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
T: Ask Ss to practice speaking .
Ss: Pair work


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to role-play in front of the class. Ask Ss to role-play in front of the class.
Ss: Open pair work


Ss: Open pair work


ACTIVITY 2 :


T: Ask Ss to give personal information
T: Ask Ss to give personal information



by answering the questions.by answering the questions.
Ss: Work in pair


Ss: Work in pair


T: Aks sts to write the answers in the exercise
T: Aks sts to write the answers in the exercise
book.


book.


Ss: Write down.
Ss: Write down.


ACTIVITY 3 :


T: Presents the structures:


T: Give example and explain the structures
Ss : listen and write it down


T : Read and ask sts to reepeat




III_ CONSOLIDATION
III_ CONSOLIDATION : :



T: Aks some sts about their information to
T: Aks some sts about their information to
consolidate the lesson.


consolidate the lesson.
Sts: Answer.


Sts: Answer.



IV:


IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK::


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


e.g : T ( showing the letter “
e.g : T ( showing the letter “a” a” ))


_ What’s this ? _ What’s this ?


S ( saying ) _ S ( saying ) _ A A / ei / / ei /
B4:


B4: Listen and repeat.Then practiceListen and repeat.Then practice




spelling your name with a partner.spelling your name with a partner.


_ _ spell spell (v ) : đánh vần( (v ) : đánh vần( <i>exampleexample ) ,</i> ) ,


_ it_ it ( pr ) : ( ( pr ) : ( <i>example + translation )example + translation</i> )
Nếu yêu cầu ai đó đánh vần tên/từ mà mình
Nếu u cầu ai đó đánh vần tên/từ mà mình
chưa nghe rõ, ta sử dụng mẫu câu sau:
chưa nghe rõ, ta sử dụng mẫu câu sau:
How do you spell your name?


How do you spell your name?


it?it?


B5:


B5: Write the answers in your exercise Write the answers in your exercise
book


book


a, What ‘s your name ?
a, What ‘s your name ?



b, How do you spell your name ?b, How do you spell your name ?
c, How old are you ?


c, How old are you ?
d, Where do you live?
d, Where do you live?
B6:


B6: Remember Remember


What ’ s your name? What ’ s your name?
What’s …= What is..
What’s …= What is..


My name’s .. = My name is …My name’s .. = My name is …


Where do you live ? Where do you live ?


I live in /on … … … I live in /on … … …


How do you spell … … … … ?How do you spell … … … … ?


*Homework:
*Homework:



Learn the lesson carefully .
Learn the lesson carefully .
Do exercises 5,6 in workbook
Do exercises 5,6 in workbook
Prepare part C1 for next lesson.
Prepare part C1 for next lesson.
VI. Comment


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Week: 3


Week: 3 <sub>Date of preparation:September 5</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 5</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:9 Date of teaching : September 7


Period:9 Date of teaching : September 7thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Unit 2


Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL: AT SCHOOL
Lesson 4: My school (C1)
Lesson 4: My school (C1)
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask and answer about school or about ask and answer about school or about
someone.


someone.


II/ Language contents:



a. Grammar : - Is this your desk? Yes, it is Is this your desk? Yes, it is


- Is that your teacher? Yes, that’s my teacher.- Is that your teacher? Yes, that’s my teacher.
b. Vocabulary: that’s = that is, school, class, desk, classroom...
III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, ,cassette, chalks, pictures
V/ Procedures :


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UP:WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask sts to play a game
T: Ask sts to play a game


Give the three clues;Give the three clues;


Ss: Listen and guess “What word it is”
Ss: Listen and guess “What word it is”
T: Tells what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tells what is going on in the lesson :



identify places , people and objectsidentify places , people and objects


<i>II_ </i>


<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
<i>Activity: 1</i>


T: Teach vocabulary .T: Teach vocabulary .


Ss: Copy down.


_Vocabulary checking:
_Vocabulary checking:


((what and wherewhat and where<i> )</i>)


<i>ACTIVITY 2 :</i>


T: Presents the structures:


T: Give example and explain the
structures


Ss : listen and write it down




Secret Word Secret Word




( What word is it ? )( What word is it ? )


<i>Clues: Clues: </i>


1- Nơi đây là một địa điểm.1- Nơi đây là một địa điểm.


2- Hầu như mọi người đều đi đến đó khi 2- Hầu như mọi người đều đi đến đó khi
cịn nhỏ.


cịn nhỏ.


3- Giáo viên làm việc tại nơi này.3- Giáo viên làm việc tại nơi này.
C1


C1: Listen and repeat.Then practice: Listen and repeat.Then practice
the dialogue with a partner.


the dialogue with a partner.


<i>vocabulary :</i>


<i>vocabulary : </i>



__schoolschool (n) : trường học (n) : trường học <i>( picture )( picture )</i>




__classroomclassroom (n) : phòng học ( (n) : phòng học (<i>picture )picture )</i>




_ _ deskdesk ( n ) : bàn học (realia) ( n ) : bàn học (realia)


_ _ teacherteacher (n) : giáo viên ( (n) : giáo viên ( <i>example )example</i> )


_ _ class class (n) : lớp học (n) : lớp học <i>(translation ) (translation )</i>


_ _ studentstudent ( n ): học sinh ( n ): học sinh <i>( example )( example )</i>




_ _ yesyes : vâng ( : vâng ( <i>miming ) miming</i> )


_ _ nono : không : không <i> ( miming ) ( miming )</i>
*This is + N


*This is + N


Được dùng để giới thiệu người hoặc vật ở gần


Được dùng để giới thiệu người hoặc vật ở gần
mình.


mình.


*That is + N
*That is + N


Được dùng để giới thiệu người hoặc vật ở xa
Được dùng để giới thiệu người hoặc vật ở xa
mình.


mình.


_ _ This isThis is my schoolmy school . .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<i>ACTIVITY 3 :</i>


T: Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue..T: Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue..
Ss: ListenSs: Listen


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each


sentence .sentence .


Ss: Repeat in chorus Ss: Repeat in chorus



T: Ask Ss to practice speaking T: Ask Ss to practice speaking
Ss: Open pair workSs: Open pair work


T: Ask Ss to role-play in front of the T: Ask Ss to role-play in front of the


ClassClass


Ss: Close pairSs: Close pair


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION :</i>:<i> </i>


T: Ask Ss to put the words into their
T: Ask Ss to put the words into their


correct order to make a complete correct order to make a complete


sentence.sentence.


Ss: Read and put them in the correct
Ss: Read and put them in the correct


Order.Order.



T: Ask sts to complete the blanks with
T: Ask sts to complete the blanks with


the correct lettersthe correct letters


Ss: Work in groups of four
Ss: Work in groups of four


<i>IV</i>


<i>IV/ HOME WORK:/ HOME WORK:</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


_ _ Is + this / that ……...… ?Is + this / that ……...… ?


Answer : Answer : Yes / No ……….Yes / No ……….
_ Is this your desk ?


<i>Backwards dictation </i>


<i>Backwards dictation </i>


1, Student a am I . 1, Student a am I .



2, School my is this.2, School my is this.


3, Teacher your this is ?3, Teacher your this is ?


4, Classroom my is that .4, Classroom my is that .


<i>First and last letter dictation</i>


<i>First and last letter dictation</i>
1, I’m a s_ _ _ _ _ t . 1, I’m a s_ _ _ _ _ t .


2, T_ _ s is my s_ _ _ _ l .2, T_ _ s is my s_ _ _ _ l .


3, T_ _ t is my c_ _ _ _ _ _ _ m . 3, T_ _ t is my c_ _ _ _ _ _ _ m .
*Homework:


*Homework:


-Learn the new words + structures by heart .
-Learn the new words + structures by heart .
-Do exercise: 2 in workbook.


-Do exercise: 2 in workbook.
-Prepare C2,3,4 for next period.
-Prepare C2,3,4 for next period.
VI. Comments


VI. Comments



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

Week: 4


Week: 4 <sub>Date of preparation:September 10</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 10</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:10 Date of teaching : September 11


Period:10 Date of teaching : September 11thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Unit 2


Unit 2 : AT SCHOOL: AT SCHOOL
Lesson 5: My school (C 2-3-4)
Lesson 5: My school (C 2-3-4)
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask and answer about things in class and ask and answer about things in class and
about school.


about school.


II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : - What is this?/ What is that? - It’s a/an... What is this?/ What is that? - It’s a/an...


b. Vocabulary: door, windown,board, clock, waste basket, school bag, pen, pencil,ruler,
eraser.


III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.



IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures
V/ Procedures


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UP:WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask sts some questions about personal
T: Ask sts some questions about personal


informationinformation
Ss: Answer
Ss: Answer


T: Aks Ss to look at the objects in the
T: Aks Ss to look at the objects in the


classroomclassroom
Ss: Look at them
Ss: Look at them


<i>II_ </i>


<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::


<i> ACTIVITY1 :</i>


T: Teach vocabulary .T: Teach vocabulary .




Ss: Coppy down


<i>_Vocabulary checking: </i>


<i>_Vocabulary checking: </i>


<i> </i>


<i> ( </i>( <i>Slap the board )Slap the board </i>)






_ What is your name ?_ What is your name ?


_ How old are you ?_ How old are you ?


_ Where do you live ?_ Where do you live ?


C2/



C2/ Listen and repeat<sub> </sub> Listen and repeat::






a door a window<sub> </sub> a door a window






</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<i>ACTIVITY2 :</i>


T: Presents the structures:


T: Give example and explain the structures
Ss : listen and write it down


T: Ask Ss to practice asking and answering
T: Ask Ss to practice asking and answering


about the objects in the classroomabout the objects in the classroom
Ss: Work in pair


Ss: Work in pair


T: Call on some pairs of students to perform


T: Call on some pairs of students to perform
in


in


front of the classroom front of the classroom
Ss: Open pair


Ss: Open pair




<i>ACTIVITY 3:</i>
T: Review.


Sts: Listen - Answer.


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>:<i> </i>:<i> </i>


T: Let sts repeat new words and structures
T: Let sts repeat new words and structures
once more.


once more.









a waste basket a school bag<sub> </sub> a waste basket a school bag






a pencil a pen<sub> </sub> a pencil a pen






a ruler an eraser<sub> </sub> a ruler an eraser






a desk a classrooma desk a classroom
C3/


C3/ Practice with a partnerPractice with a partner : :
Hỏi vật ở gần:


WHAT IS THIS ?


Hỏi vật ở xa:


WHAT


S THAT?


S THAT? Trả lời:


IT ’ S A / AN … … …
Ex: What is this ?


Ex: What is this ?


It ‘s a door ( point the door )It ‘s a door ( point the door )
C4/


C4/REMEMBER REMEMBER
What is this ?
What is this ?


What is that ? It’s a /an … …
What is that ? It’s a /an … …
This is … …


This is … …
That is … …
That is … …
This is my school .
This is my school .


That is my desk .
That is my desk .
*


*HomeworkHomework::


-Learn the new words + structures by heart .
-Learn the new words + structures by heart .
-Do exercises: 1,3 in workbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<i>IV</i>


<i>IV: HOME WORK:: HOME WORK:</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
VI. Comments


VI. Comments


****************************************
****************************************


Week: 4


Week: 4 <sub>Date of preparation:September 11</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 11</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:11 Date of teaching : September 12


Period:11 Date of teaching : September 12thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>



<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i><b> Unit 3</b></i>

<b>Unit 3</b>

<b>: AT HOME</b>

<b>: AT HOME</b>


<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2</b>
<b> Lesson 2: A3</b>
<b> Lesson 3: A4,6</b>
<b> Lesson 4: B1,2</b>
<b> Lesson 5: B3,4,5,6 </b>
<b> Lesson 6: C1,2,4</b>


<b> </b>
<b> </b>


<b> Lesson 1: My house (A1,2)Lesson 1: My house (A1,2)</b>
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to identify some objects in the living- room identify some objects in the living- room
and ask - answer about them.


and ask - answer about them.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : _ What’s this/ that ? _ What are these / those ?_ What’s this/ that ? _ What are these / those ?


_ It’s _ It’s a clock / an erasera clock / an eraser. _ They are chairs. _ They are chairs



b. Vocabulary: house, living room, table, chair, armchair, couch, stool, telephone,
bookshelf, lamp, television, stereo, these, those.


III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures, realia.realia.
V/ ProceduresProcedures


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UPWARM UP::</i>
<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> WORDSQUARE WORDSQUARE </i>


A1


A1: Listen and repeat: Listen and repeat


Page 20
W



W AA SS TT EE BB AA SS KK EE
O


O LL NN RR UU LL EE RR OO TT
D


D PP UU LL OO AA BB RR II LL
N


N OO EE OO ZZ OO OO AA LL OO
I


I NN HH NN AA TT AA NN GG NN
W


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

_ Tell what is going on in the lesson :
_ Tell what is going on in the lesson :
identifying things in the living-room.
identifying things in the living-room.


<i>II_ </i>


<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON : :</i>


<i>ACTIVITY1:</i>


T: Ask Ss to listen to the tape.
T: Ask Ss to listen to the tape.
Ss: Listen



Ss: Listen


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat word by word.
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat word by word.
Ss: Repeat in chorus


Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Ask Ss to practise pronouncing all the
T: Ask Ss to practise pronouncing all the
words.


words.


T: Ask Ss to name some objects .
T: Ask Ss to name some objects .


<i>Vocabulary checking : </i>


<i>Vocabulary checking : </i> ( (<i>matching )matching </i>)




<i>ACTIVITY2</i>


T: Show the picture to the Ss and explain
T: Show the picture to the Ss and explain
what they have to do in this exercise.



what they have to do in this exercise.
Ss: Listen and get.


Ss: Listen and get.


<i>T_ Presents the structures:</i>


<i>T_ Presents the structures:</i>


T: Give example and explain the structures
Ss : listen and write it down




VocabularyVocabulary


_


_ househouse ( n ): ngôi nhà ( n ): ngôi nhà (picture)(picture)
_


_ living-roomliving-room ( n : phòng khách ( n : phòng khách (picture)(picture)
_


_ stereostereo ( n ): máy nghe nhạc ( n ): máy nghe nhạc (picture)(picture)
_


_ tabletable ( n ) : cái bàn ( n ) : cái bàn ( realia )( realia )
_



_ telephonetelephone ( n ): máy đth ( n ): máy đth (realia)(realia)
_


_ bookshelfbookshelf ( n ): giá sách ( ( n ): giá sách (picturepicture ) )
_


_ couch couch (n) : ghế sa - lông dài (n) : ghế sa - lông dài (picture)(picture)
_


_ televisiontelevision (n) : vơ tuyến truyền hình (n) : vơ tuyến truyền hình
(picture)


(picture)
_


_ armchairarmchair(n) : ghế sa-lông (n) : ghế sa-lông (picture)(picture)
_


_ chairchair ( n ) : ghế tựa ( n ) : ghế tựa (realia)(realia)
_


_ lamplamp ( n ) : cái đèn bàn ( n ) : cái đèn bàn (realia)(realia)
_ stool (n) : ghế đẩu


_ stool (n) : ghế đẩu
A2


A2: Listen and repeat<sub> </sub>: Listen and repeat



-


- <i>GrammarGrammar</i>
@


@ __Hỏi một vật ở gần/xaHỏi một vật ở gần/xa mình: mình:


What ‘ s this / that ?What ‘ s this / that ?


_Trả lời : _Trả lời : It’s It’s <i>a/ an + tên đồ vật.a/ an + tên đồ vật</i>.
@


@ _ _ Hỏi nhiều vật ở gần/xa mìnhHỏi nhiều vật ở gần/xa mình : :


What are these / those ?What are these / those ?


_Trả lời : _Trả lời : They are + They are + <i>tên đồ vậttên đồ vật</i>




a/ What is this ?a/ What is this ?


It is a lampIt is a lamp



b/ What are these ?b/ What are these ?


They are armchairsThey are armchairs


c/ What are those ?c/ What are those ?


They are stools They are stools
*Homework:


*Homework:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION :</i>:<i> </i>


T: Have a student point at an object and ask
T: Have a student point at an object and ask


What’s this / that ? What’s this / that ? and and What are these /What are these /


those ?those ?and the other answers .and the other answers .
Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs



T: Ask some pairs of Ss to perform in front of
T: Ask some pairs of Ss to perform in front of


the class the class


Ss: Open pair work
Ss: Open pair work


<i>IV</i>


<i>IV: HOME WORK:: HOME WORK:</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


-Prepare A3,4,5,6 for next period
-Prepare A3,4,5,6 for next period


VI. Comments
VI. Comments


*****************************************
*****************************************
Week: 4


Week: 4 <sub>Date of preparation:September 12</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 12</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:12 Date of teaching : September 13



Period:12 Date of teaching : September 13thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> Unit 3</i>Unit 3 : AT HOME: AT HOME
Lesson 2: My house (A3)
Lesson 2: My house (A3)
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to play role of Ba to tell about the family, play role of Ba to tell about the family,
then ask-answer about Ba’s family through Qs: name, age, career.


then ask-answer about Ba’s family through Qs: name, age, career.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : _ Who’s this/ that ? _ What’s her name? - her name is Nga_ Who’s this/ that ? _ What’s her name? - her name is Nga


_ How old is she? - She’s...._ How old is she? - She’s....


b. Vocabulary: family, people, father , mother, brother, sister, her, hisfamily, people, father , mother, brother, sister, her, his , how many, too.
III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’s / students ’ activities



Teacher ’s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UPWARM UP: :</i> ( Family tree )( Family tree )


T: Set the situation : ( Asks Ss to look T: Set the situation : ( Asks Ss to look


at the cues and guess the topic )at the cues and guess the topic )
Ss: look at the picture and answer the Ss: look at the picture and answer the
question.


question.








_ Tells what is going on in the lesson :
_ Tells what is going on in the lesson : talk talk
about family members.


about family members.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

<i>II_ </i>



<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON : :</i>
<i>ACTIVITY 1:</i>


<i>ACTIVITY 1:</i>


T: Teach new words.
T: Teach new words.


<i>Vocabulary checking : </i>


<i>Vocabulary checking : (</i> (<i>matching matching </i>) )


<i>_Present the structures:</i>


<i>_Present the structures:</i>


T: Give example and explain the
structures


Ss : listen and write it down
T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the text.
T: Ask Ss to Ss listen to the text.


Ask Ss to listen and repeat sentence byAsk Ss to listen and repeat sentence by


sentence. sentence.



Ss: Repeat in chorus
Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Ask Ss to practise reading the text.
T: Ask Ss to practise reading the text.


Ask some Ss to read the text . Ask some Ss to read the text .


<i>ACTIVITY 2:</i>


<i>ACTIVITY 2:</i>


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


Ss: Listen and get


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>:<i> </i>:<i> </i>




_ Ask Ss to write the sentences with the _ Ask Ss to write the sentences with the
cues


cues



from the family tree.from the family tree.
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


Remark the lesson and give homework.Remark the lesson and give homework.






Ba LanBa Lan


Student studentStudent student
12 years old 15 years old
12 years old 15 years old
A3


A3: Listen and repeat . Then practice.: Listen and repeat . Then practice.
-


- VocabularyVocabulary((<i>example + family tree)example + family tree</i>)
_


_familyfamily(n): gia đình(n): gia đình
__peoplepeople (n) : người (n) : người
_ _ fatherfather (n) : cha (n) : cha
_ _ mothermother (n) : mẹ (n) : mẹ



_ _ sistersister ( n ) : chị/ em gái ( n ) : chị/ em gái


_ _ brotherbrother ( n ): anh , em trai ( n ): anh , em trai <i> ( example ) ( example )</i>
_ _ he he (pr) : ông ấy , anh ấy , cậu ấy (pr) : ông ấy , anh ấy , cậu ấy


_ _ hishis ( a ) :của ông ấy/ anh ấy/ cậu ấy ( a ) :của ông ấy/ anh ấy/ cậu ấy
_ she_ she(pr) : bà ấy, chị ấy, cô ấy(pr) : bà ấy, chị ấy, cô ấy


_ _ herher ( a ) : của bà ấy/ chị ấy/ cô ấy ( a ) : của bà ấy/ chị ấy/ cô ấy


- - <i>GrammarGrammar</i>




_ Who’s this/ that ? _ It’s Lan. _ Who’s this/ that ? _ It’s Lan.


_ How many people are there in your _ How many people are there in your
family?


family?


_ There are four people in my family._ There are four people in my family.


@ @ __Hỏi đây là ai/ kia là ai?Hỏi đây là ai/ kia là ai?



Who‘ s this / that ?Who‘ s this / that ?


@_Trả lời : @_Trả lời : It’sIt’s<i> + tên người. + tên người</i>.


<i>*</i>


<i>*HomeworkHomework: :</i>


- Learn the new words / structures by heart .
- Learn the new words / structures by heart .
- Write something about your family.
- Write something about your family.
VI. Comments


VI. Comments


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

Week: 5


Week: 5 <sub>Date of preparation:September 17</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 17</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:13 Date of teaching : September 18


Period:13 Date of teaching : September 18thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> Unit 3</i>Unit 3 : AT HOME: AT HOME


Lesson 2: My house (A4,6)
Lesson 2: My house (A4,6)
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to play role of Ba to tell about my family, play role of Ba to tell about my family,
then ask-answer about Ba’s family through Qs: name, age, career.


then ask-answer about Ba’s family through Qs: name, age, career.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : _ Who’s this/ that ? _ What’s her name? - her name is Nga_ Who’s this/ that ? _ What’s her name? - her name is Nga


_ How old is she? - She’s...._ How old is she? - She’s....
b. Vocabulary:


III/ TT echniques: echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.
IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, chalks, pictures,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UPWARM UP: :</i>










</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<i>II_ </i>


<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON : :</i>


<i>ACTIVITY1</i>


T: Have a student point at each picture and
T: Have a student point at each picture and
ask


ask


What’s her/his name ? What’s her/his name ?
or or Who’s this/that ?Who’s this/that ?


and and How old is he/she ?How old is he/she ?
and the other answers.
and the other answers.
Ss: Pair work


Ss: Pair work


<i>ACTIVITY 2( *)</i>



<i>ACTIVITY 2( *)</i>


T: Ask sts to answer Qs about them.
T: Ask sts to answer Qs about them.
Sts: Individually work.


Sts: Individually work.


Then check each other.Then check each other.


<i>ACTIVITY 3:</i>


<i>ACTIVITY 3:</i>


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


Ss: Listen and get


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>:<i> </i>:<i> </i>




_ Ask Ss to write the sentences with the _ Ask Ss to write the sentences with the
cues



cues


from the family tree.from the family tree.


__Ask Ss to fill in the blank with the Ask Ss to fill in the blank with the
suitable


suitable


word. word.


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


Remark the lesson and give homework.Remark the lesson and give homework.


A4:


A4: Answer the questionsAnswer the questions..


a) What’s her name? b)What’s his
a) What’s her name? b)What’s his
name?


name?







Her name’s Nga. His name’s Ha.
Her name’s Nga. His name’s Ha.
c) Who’s that ? d) What’s this ?
c) Who’s that ? d) What’s this ?


How old is he ? How old is she?How old is he ? How old is she?






That’s Ba This is Lan.
That’s Ba This is Lan.
He is twelve years old. She is fifteen.
He is twelve years old. She is fifteen.
e/ There are four people in the family.
e/ There are four people in the family.
A5/


A5/ Answer the questions<b>Answer the questions</b>::


a/ My name is ……… / I’m
a/ My name is ……… / I’m
………



………


b/ I’m ………
b/ I’m ………


c/ There are ……… people in my
c/ There are ……… people in my
family.


family.
A6:


A6: RememberRemember..


How old is ……….?How old is ……….?


How many people are there …………..?How many people are there …………..?


There are …… people ………. .There are …… people ………. .


Who is this ? This is …………..Who is this ? This is …………..


Who is that ? That is …………. .Who is that ? That is …………. .



He’s a taecher . He’s a taecher .


She ‘s teacher, too .She ‘s teacher, too .


<i>There are four _______ in Ba’s family . This </i>


<i>There are four _______ in Ba’s family . This </i>


<i>is his _____ . His name is Ha .He is forty </i>


<i>is his _____ . His name is Ha .He is forty </i>


<i>years old. He is a _____This is his ______ . </i>


<i>years old. He is a _____This is his ______ . </i>


<i>Her name is Nga. She is thirty-six . _____ is a</i>


<i>Her name is Nga. She is thirty-six . _____ is a</i>


<i>teacher , too. This is his ______. Her name is </i>


<i>teacher , too. This is his ______. Her name is </i>


<i>Lan . She is fifteen . She is a ______</i>


<i>Lan . She is fifteen . She is a ______</i>


<i>*</i>



<i>*HomeworkHomework: :</i>


- Learn the new words / structures by heart .
- Learn the new words / structures by heart .
- Do Exercises 3, 4 in workbook.


- Do Exercises 3, 4 in workbook.


- Write something about your family.
- Write something about your family.
VI. Comments


VI. Comments


================================================================
================================================================
Week: 5


Week: 5 <sub>Date of preparation:September 18</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 18</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> Unit 3</i>Unit 3 : AT HOME: AT HOME
Lesson 3: Numbers (B1,2)
Lesson 3: Numbers (B1,2)
I/ Objectives:



By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask for and give numbers, use singular andask for and give numbers, use singular and
plural nouns.


plural nouns.


II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : There is/ are...There is/ are...
b. Vocabulary: zero _ hundred,zero _ hundred, bench bench


III/ TT echniques: echniques: groupwork, individual work. groupwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, picture,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_ </i>


<i>I_ WARM UPWARM UP: (Secret word ) :</i> (Secret word )


What word is it ?What word is it ?


_Tell what is going on in the lessonTell what is going on in the lesson:
cardinal numbers from 0 to 100.cardinal numbers from 0 to 100.


<i>II_ </i>



<i>II_ NEW LESSONNEW LESSON : :</i>
<i>ACTIVITY1</i>


<i>ACTIVITY1</i>


T: Ask Ss to give the numbers from 0 to 20.
T: Ask Ss to give the numbers from 0 to 20.
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


T: Ask Ss to find out the point of similarity
T: Ask Ss to find out the point of similarity


between the numbers from 13 to 19.between the numbers from 13 to 19.


_ Present formation of the numbers _ Present formation of the numbers


( suffix ( suffix teen teen ))


_ Present the round numbers : ( suffix _ Present the round numbers : ( suffix ty ty ) )


_ Present the double numbers : _ Present the double numbers :



<i>_Vocabulary checking :</i>


<i>_Vocabulary checking : </i>


<i>( slap the board( slap the board</i> ) )
_Ask Ss to ask for and say an address._Ask Ss to ask for and say an address.


aa- 25 Tran Phu Street - 25 Tran Phu Street


bb- 37 Quang Trung Street - 37 Quang Trung Street


cc- 46 Tran Hung Dao Street - 46 Tran Hung Dao Street


dd- 52 Ngo Quyen Street- 52 Ngo Quyen Street


ee- 64 Le Loi Street - 64 Le Loi Street


ff- 100 Hai Ba Trung Street - 100 Hai Ba Trung Street


gg- 78- Tran Quoc Toan Street - 78- Tran Quoc Toan Street



hh- 89-Nguyen Trai Street - 89-Nguyen Trai Street


<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>1-1-</b></i> Từ này có 6 chữ cái.Từ này có 6 chữ cái.
<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>2-2-</b></i> Nó khởi đầu bằng chữ Nó khởi đầu bằng chữ <i>n và kết thúc n</i> và kết thúc
bằng chữ


bằng chữ <i>rr</i>



<i><b></b></i>


<i><b>3-3-</b></i> Nó có ch ẵn và lẽNó có ch
B1:


B1: Listen and repeat the numbersListen and repeat the numbers::
14,16, 17, 18 , 19 .


14,16, 17, 18 , 19 .
13


13<sub></sub>30, 14<sub></sub>30, 1440, 15<sub></sub>40<sub></sub> , 15<sub></sub>50, 16<sub></sub>50, 1660, 17<sub></sub><sub></sub>60, 17<sub></sub>70 , 18<sub></sub>70 , 1880 , 19<sub></sub><sub></sub>80 , 19<sub></sub>90<sub></sub>90
100:


100: one hundredone hundred
21:



21: twenty-onetwenty-one , 32: thirty-two , 32: thirty-two , ,
49:


49: forty-nineforty-nine , 58: , 58: fifty-eight , etcfifty-eight , etc
Note


Note : : <i> a hyphen between double numbers a hyphen between double numbers </i>


B2:


B2: PracticePractice


( Count the items in the classroom )( Count the items in the classroom )
N


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<i>ACTIVITY2</i>


T: Show the pictures to the students and
explain


how to do this exercise


Ss: listen and look at the picture


T: Ask students to work in group of four to
count the items in the picture


Ss: work in group of four
T: Give the correct answer



<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION :</i>:<i> </i>


T: Tell Ss to listen and cross the numbers they
T: Tell Ss to listen and cross the numbers they


hear.hear.


T: Ask Ss to say the numbers from 0 to 12 ,
T: Ask Ss to say the numbers from 0 to 12 ,


from 13 to 19 and the round numbers fromfrom 13 to 19 and the round numbers from


20 to 100 20 to 100
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.







…… door(s) … window(s) … table(s)door(s) … window(s) … table(s)




…… chair(s) … student(s) … board(s)chair(s) … student(s) … board(s)


…… desk(s) … eraser(s) ... ruler(s)desk(s) … eraser(s) ... ruler(s)


…… book(s) … bench(es) … clock(s)book(s) … bench(es) … clock(s)
*Note:


*Note:


Đối với những d.từ tận cùng bằng”ch, sh, s, x,
Đối với những d.từ tận cùng bằng”ch, sh, s, x,
o” (nếu trước “o” là một phụ âm) thì khi
o” (nếu trước “o” là một phụ âm) thì khi
thành lập d.từ số nhiều ta thêm “es” và đọc
thành lập d.từ số nhiều ta thêm “es” và đọc
là /iz/.


là /iz/.


Ex: a bench - benches
Ex: a bench - benches


a box - boxesa box - boxes
15



15 50 67 12 50 67 12 18 30 18 30 80 80
100


100 13 16 13 16 70 40 70 40 9191
*Homework:


*Homework:


Learn by heart the numbers.
Learn by heart the numbers.
Do exercises: 1, 2 in workbook.
Do exercises: 1, 2 in workbook.


Prepare parts: B3,4,5,6 for next lesson.
Prepare parts: B3,4,5,6 for next lesson.


VI. Comments
VI. Comments


================================================================
================================================================
Week: 5


Week: 5 <sub>Date of preparation:September 19</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 19</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:15 Date of teaching : September 20th, 2017
Period:15 Date of teaching : September 20th, 2017


<i> </i>



<i> </i>


<i> Unit 3</i>Unit 3 : AT HOME: AT HOME
Lesson 4: Numbers (B3,4,5,6)
Lesson 4: Numbers (B3,4,5,6)
I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to use question “How many...are there?” use question “How many...are there?”
and answer “There is/ are...”. Review singular and plural nouns, the way to read them.
and answer “There is/ are...”. Review singular and plural nouns, the way to read them.
II/ Language contents:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

b. Vocabulary: bookcabookcase , se , things in the classroom and in the living-room.things in the classroom and in the living-room.
III/ TT echniques: echniques: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, picture,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_</i>


<i>I_WARM UPWARM UP: :</i>




( NETWORK )( NETWORK )



T: Ask Ss to give words related to
T: Ask Ss to give words related to


things in the classroom and in the things in the classroom and in the


living-room.living-room.
Ss: Group work
Ss: Group work


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


asking for and say the number of asking for and say the number of


objects.objects.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON:</i>


<i> ACTIVITY1</i>
T:


T: Review the plural nouns: Review the plural nouns:
Ss: Listen and write down
Ss: Listen and write down



T: Asks Ss to listen and repeat the plural
T: Asks Ss to listen and repeat the plural
nouns


nouns


in in 22 and and 55 . .


_Present the structures:
_Present the structures:


T: Give example and explain the structures
Ss : listen and write it down


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat the questions
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat the questions


and answers in B3and answers in B3


<i>ACTIVITY2</i>


T: Ask Ss to practise the structure
T: Ask Ss to practise the structure How How
many…


many…




are there ?are there ?( ( <i>ask and answer )( Noughts andask and answer </i>)( Noughts and


Crosses).Crosses).
Ss: Team work
Ss: Team work
ACTIVITY3


T: Show the pictures to the students and


B3:


B3: Listen and repeat.Listen and repeat.


Cách thành lập danh từ số nhiều:Cách thành lập danh từ số nhiều:
+Thông thường:_Thêm “


+Thông thường:_Thêm “s”s” vào danh từ vào danh từ


<sub></sub><sub></sub>a doora doordoor<sub></sub>door<sub></sub> s ,a books ,a book<sub></sub>books<sub></sub>books
+ Thêm “


+ Thêm “es”es” vào danh từ tận cùng bằng: vào danh từ tận cùng bằng: s , s ,
x , o , ch , sh


x , o , ch , sh




<sub></sub><sub></sub>a coucha couch<sub></sub> couches<sub></sub> couches
+Danh từ tận cùng bằng


+Danh từ tận cùng bằng y y , đổi , đổi yy <sub></sub><sub></sub>ii rồi thêm rồi thêm


“es”es”




<sub></sub><sub></sub>a familya family<sub></sub>families<sub></sub>families
+


+Danh từ tận cùng bằng Danh từ tận cùng bằng ff , đổi , đổi f f <sub></sub><sub></sub> vv rồi thêm rồi thêm


“es”es”




<sub></sub><sub></sub>a bookshelf a bookshelf <sub></sub>bookshelves<sub></sub>bookshelves


Cách phát âm: Cách phát âm:
+


+ “ “s”s” thông thường được đọc / z / thông thường được đọc / z /
+ “s”



+ “s” được đọc / s / sau / p , k , t , f / được đọc / s / sau / p , k , t , f /


+ “es” được đọc / iz / khi danh từ tận cùng
bằng


ces , ses , xes, ches, shes , ges , zes
@


@ _ _ Hỏi có bao nhiêu...? Hỏi có bao nhiêu...? : :


How many+danh từ số nhiều+are there ?
How many+danh từ số nhiều+are there ?


_Trả lời : _Trả lời : There is one .There is one .


There are (two).There are (two).


_ How many windows are there ? _ How many windows are there ?


<i>_ There are two._ There are two.</i>


_ How many boards are there ?
_ There is one .


B4: Practice with a partner.




How many … are there ?How many … are there ?


There is /are …………There is /are …………
B5: Practice.


classroo


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

living-explain


how to do this exercise


Ss: listen end look at the picture


T: Ask students to work in group of four to
count the items in the picture


Ss: work in group of four
T: Give the correct answer


<i>ACTIVITY4</i>


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


Ss: Listen and get



<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION :</i>:<i> </i>


T: Ask Ss to write the meaningful sentences
T: Ask Ss to write the meaningful sentences


from the cuesfrom the cues


Ss: Work in groups of four.
Ss: Work in groups of four.


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


Remark the lesson and give homework.
Remark the lesson and give homework.


(Count the items in the livingroom)





…couch(es) …lamp(s) …bookcase(s)…couch(es) …lamp(s) …bookcase(s)
…armchair(s) …book(s) …telephone(s)…armchair(s) …book(s) …telephone(s)
…table(s) …chair(s) …stereo(s)…table(s) …chair(s) …stereo(s)
…television(s) …stool(s) …people…television(s) …stool(s) …people
B6: Remember.


How many+danh từ số nhiều+are there ?


How many+danh từ số nhiều+are there ?


There is one . There is one . There are (two).There are (two).
a) How many / student / there / your class ?a) How many / student / there / your class ?


How many students are there in your class? How many students are there in your class?
b) There / forty-two / teacher / my school.
b) There / forty-two / teacher / my school.


There are forty-two teachers in my school.There are forty-two teachers in my school.
c) There / one / chair / the classroom.c) There / one / chair / the classroom.




There is one chair in the classroom.There is one chair in the classroom.


d) How many / people / there / your family ?d) How many / people / there / your family ?


How many people are there in your family?How many people are there in your family?
1) Có bao nhiêu học sinh trong lớp của bạn ?
1) Có bao nhiêu học sinh trong lớp của bạn ?


How many students are there in your class?How many students are there in your class?
2) Có 16 phịng học trong trường của tơi.
2) Có 16 phịng học trong trường của tôi.




There are 16 classrooms in my school.There are 16 classrooms in my school.
*


*HomeworkHomework::


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.


Do exercises B3-4 on page 22 in the
Do exercises B3-4 on page 22 in the
workbook.


workbook.
VI. Comments


VI. Comments


***********************************
***********************************
Week: 6


Week: 6 <sub>Date of preparation: 24/09/ 2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 24/09/ 2017</sub>


Period:16 Date of teaching : 25/09/ 2017
Period:16 Date of teaching : 25/09/ 2017


<i> </i>



<i> </i>


<b>Unit 3</b>


<b>Unit 3 : AT HOME: AT HOME</b>
<b>Lesson 6</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about the family in the picture, talk talk about the family in the picture, talk
about Song’s family. Good sts can talk and write about his/ her family.


about Song’s family. Good sts can talk and write about his/ her family.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : What does he/ she do?


Review: How many...?; How old...?


b. Vocabulary: we, our, me, engineer, doctor, nurse, job, age.we, our, me, engineer, doctor, nurse, job, age.
<b>III/ TT echniques:echniques: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>IV/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, cassette, chalks, picture,
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_</i>


<i>I_WARM UPWARM UP:: ( </i>(Secret wordSecret word ) )





T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
talking


talking


about family members ‘ job and age ’.about family members ‘ job and age ’.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESON :NEW LESON</i> :
<i>ACTIVITY1</i>


T: Teach vo
T: Teach vo


_Vocabulary checking :


_Vocabulary checking : ( matching( matching ) )


T: Show the poster of statements and ask Ss T: Show the poster of statements and ask Ss
to read and guess which is true and which is
to read and guess which is true and which is


false false


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask students to open their books and read
T: Ask students to open their books and read


the text on page 38 and lets Ss check theirthe text on page 38 and lets Ss check their


prediction .prediction .


What word is it ?
1-Từ này có 6 chữ cái .
1-Từ này có 6 chữ cái .


2-Nó bắt đầu bằng chữ “f” và kết thúc
2-Nó bắt đầu bằng chữ “f” và kết thúc
bằng chữ “y”.


bằng chữ “y”.


3-Nó bao gồm những thành viên cùng
3-Nó bao gồm những thành viên cùng
sống trong một nhà.


sống trong một nhà.
C1:


C1: Listen and readListen and read . .



Then answer the questionsThen answer the questions
_ _ ageage ( n ) : tuổi ( ( n ) : tuổi ( <i>example )example </i>)


_ _ jobjob ( n ) nghề nghiệp ( ( n ) nghề nghiệp ( <i>network ) network</i> )
_ _ engineerengineer ( n ): kỹ sư ( ( n ): kỹ sư ( <i>translation ) translation</i> )
_ _ doctordoctor ( n ): bác sỹ ( ( n ): bác sỹ ( <i>example + example + </i>
<i>picture</i>


<i>picture ) </i> )


<sub></sub>He is a doctor . <sub></sub>He is a doctor .
_ _ nursenurse ( n ) ; y tá( ( n ) ; y tá( <i>example + picture ) example + picture</i> )


<sub></sub>She is a nurse. <sub></sub>She is a nurse.


_ we : chúng tôi _ our : của chúng tôi
_me: tôi


* What does he/she do?
He/ She is a/an...


_


_ <i>T / F statement prediction:T / F statement prediction:</i>


1



1- - There are There are fivefive people in Nga’s people in Nga’s
family. (four)


family. (four)


2- Nga’s father is an engineer .2- Nga’s father is an engineer .
F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

Ss: Pair work
Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to correct false statements.
T: Ask Ss to correct false statements.


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and answer
T: Ask Ss to read the text again and answer


the questions .the questions .
Ss: Work in pair
Ss: Work in pair


<i>ACTIVITY2</i>
T:


T: Ask Ss to talk about Song’s family with Ask Ss to talk about Song’s family with
the cues in C2.


the cues in C2.
Ss: Group work


Ss: Group work


<i>ACTIVITY: 3</i>


T: Show the picture and ask.
T: Show the picture and ask.
Sts: Repeat after the T.
Sts: Repeat after the T.


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


Ss: Listen and get


3- Her mother is a teacher 3- Her mother is a teacher


4- Her brother is 4- Her brother is eleveneleven. ( eight ). ( eight )


<sub></sub><sub></sub>1_ F , 2 _ T , 3 _ T , 4 _ 1_ F , 2 _ T , 3 _ T , 4 _
F


F


a) There are four people in their family.


a) There are four people in their family.
b) He is forty.


b) He is forty.


c) He is an engineer.
c) He is an engineer.
d) She is thirty-five .
d) She is thirty-five .
e) She is a teacher .
e) She is a teacher .
f) He is eight .
f) He is eight .
g) He is a student.
g) He is a student.


h) They are in the living room.
h) They are in the living room.
C2:


C2: Practice with a partnerPractice with a partner..


Mr Kien /Doctor Mrs Mr Kien /Doctor Mrs


Oanh/nurse
Oanh/nurse


42 years old 39 years42 years old 39 years


old


old




Lan/ student Song/ Lan/ student Song/
student


student


15 years old 12years 15 years old 12years
old


old
C3/


C3/ Play with wordsPlay with words::


How many people are there in the
How many people are there in the
picture?


picture?


There are five.
There are five.
C4:



C4: RememberRemember..
I _ My
I _ My
We _
We _
Our
Our


He _
He _
His


His


She _
She _
Her


Her


You _ Your
You _ Your
They - Their
They - Their


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<i>IV_ HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.



Write a paragraph about your family.
Write a paragraph about your family.
Do exercises: 1,2,3,4,5 in workbook.
Do exercises: 1,2,3,4,5 in workbook.
V. Comment


V. Comment


================================================================
================================================================
Week: 6


Week: 6 <sub>Date of preparation:September 25</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 25</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>


Period:17 Date of teaching : September 26th, 2017
Period:17 Date of teaching : September 26th, 2017


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>
<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>
<b>I/ Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to review what they have leart from unit 1 to review what they have leart from unit 1 to
unit 3.


unit 3.



<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Wh-questions Wh-questions withwith What / How / How old / Where / How many What / How / How old / Where / How many


_ There is / are………._ There is / are……….


_ S + be + ( tên / danh từ nghề nghiệp )_ S + be + ( tên / danh từ nghề nghiệp )


_ This is ………._ This is ……….


_ Imperative_ Imperative
b. Vocabulary: yard, friend.yard, friend.


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques: echniques: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures</b>


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_</i>


<i>I_WARM UPWARM UP :</i>:<i> </i>



T: Ask Ss to put the words into the same
T: Ask Ss to put the words into the same


group.group.


<i>Ss: Group work</i>


<i>Ss: Group work</i>


T: Tells what is going on in the lesson .
T: Tells what is going on in the lesson .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON</i>:


ACTIVITY 1


T: Review the verb “Tobe” (its form and
T: Review the verb “Tobe” (its form and


meaning).meaning).


T: Get ss to fill in the blanks with the
T: Get ss to fill in the blanks with the
suitable



suitable


form of the verb.form of the verb.
T: Get ss to take notes.
T: Get ss to take notes.
<i>ACTIVITY2</i>


<i> </i>


<i> where , I , is , he , who , doctor , youwhere , I , is , he , who , doctor , you</i>
<i> </i>


<i> father , am , she , what , teacher , wefather , am , she , what , teacher , we</i>
<i> </i>


<i> how , they , mother , are , student , sisterhow , they , mother , are , student , sister</i>


I.


I. Tobe: Tobe:


- Be: am, is, are
- Be: am, is, are
- Meaning: thì, là, ở.
- Meaning: thì, là, ở.


- Use: I am
- Use: I am



You/ We/ They areYou/ We/ They are


He/ She/ It isHe/ She/ It is
1/ am - am - are - is - are
1/ am - am - are - is - are
2/ am - is - is - are - are
2/ am - is - is - are - are


3/ a. are - am c. Is - isn’t
3/ a. are - am c. Is - isn’t


b. is - is d. Are - aren’t.b. is - is d. Are - aren’t.
II.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

T: Review the commands
T: Review the commands


T: Get ss to give the commands according to
T: Get ss to give the commands according to
the situation.


the situation.
<i>ACTIVITY3</i>


T: Review the question sentence
T: Review the question sentence



“How many…. are“How many…. are
there….?”


there….?”


T: Get ss to practise asking and answering
T: Get ss to practise asking and answering


about the items in the classroomabout the items in the classroom


<i>ACTIVITY4</i>


T: Review the question words.
T: Review the question words.


T: Get ss to retell the question words and fill
T: Get ss to retell the question words and fill
in


in


the gaps with a suitable one.the gaps with a suitable one.
<i>ACTIVITY5</i>


T: Review the numbers
T: Review the numbers



T: Get ss to the words for the numbers and
T: Get ss to the words for the numbers and
the


the


number for the words.number for the words.
T: Ask ss to read them aloud.
T: Ask ss to read them aloud.
<i>ACTIVITY6</i>


T: Review the greetings
T: Review the greetings


T: Get ss to give the greeting according to
T: Get ss to give the greeting according to
the


the


situationsituation
<i>ACTIVITY7</i>


T: Review the pronouns This/ That and
T: Review the pronouns This/ That and
These/


These/




Those.Those.


T: Get ss to fill in the blank with a suitable
T: Get ss to fill in the blank with a suitable
one


one


<i>III: </i>


<i>III: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


c. Open your book
c. Open your book
. Close your book
. Close your book
e. Stand up


e. Stand up
III.


III. Question: “How many…… are there…?’’ Question: “How many…… are there…?’’

windowswindows

doorsdoors

desksdesks



+How many tables are there in your
+How many tables are there in your
classroom?
classroom?

chairschairs

boardboard
+ There is………….
+ There is………….


There are………..There are………..
a. There is one.
a. There is one.
b. There are six.
b. There are six.
c. There are two.
c. There are two.
d. There is one.
d. There is one.
IV.


IV.Question words:Question words:
a. What - is
a. What - is
b. Where - live
b. Where - live
c. Who - is


c. Who - is
d. What - is
d. What - is
V.


V. Numbers: Numbers: From 1 to 100 From 1 to 100
* Notes: + Four- Fourteen- Forty
* Notes: + Four- Fourteen- Forty


+ Five- Fifteen- Fifty+ Five- Fifteen- Fifty


+ One hundred- Two hundred+ One hundred- Two hundred



6.


6. Greeting: Greeting:
+ Hello/ Hi
+ Hello/ Hi


+ Good morning/ afternoon/ evening.
+ Good morning/ afternoon/ evening.
+ Bye/ Goodbye


+ Bye/ Goodbye
7.



7. This/ ThatThis/ That::
* The pronouns:
* The pronouns:
+ This/ That ( số ít)
+ This/ That ( số ít)


+ These/ Those (số nhiều)
+ These/ Those (số nhiều)
That - Is - Yes


That - Is - Yes
This - Is - isn’t
This - Is - isn’t




 Homework:Homework:
Do all exercises
Do all exercises


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.






==============================================================================


==============================================================================



Week: 6


Week: 6 <sub>Date of preparation:September 25</sub><sub>Date of preparation:September 25</sub>thth<sub>, 2017</sub><sub>, 2017</sub>
Period:18 Date of teaching : September 28th, 2017


Period:18 Date of teaching : September 28th, 2017


<b>THE FIRST TEST OF SEMESTER I.</b>


<b>THE FIRST TEST OF SEMESTER I. (45 minutes)(45 minutes)</b>
<b>_</b>


<b>_ObjectivesObjectives::</b>


Help sts to check up their knowledge and review what they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 3.
Help sts to check up their knowledge and review what they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 3.




<b>MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 1 LỚP 6 NĂM HỌC 2017-2018MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 1 LỚP 6 NĂM HỌC 2017-2018</b>


<b>NỘI DUNG</b>
<b>NỘI DUNG</b>
<b>CHƯƠNG</b>
<b>CHƯƠNG</b>
<b>TRÌNH </b>
<b>TRÌNH </b>


<b>MỨC ĐỘ</b>


<b>MỨC ĐỘ</b>


<b>TỔNG SỐ</b>
<b>TỔNG SỐ</b>
<b>CHỦ</b>


<b>CHỦ</b>
<b>ĐỀ</b>


<b>ĐỀ</b> <b>NHẬN BIẾTNHẬN BIẾT</b> <b>THÔNG HIỂUTHÔNG HIỂU</b> <b>VẬN DỤNGVẬN DỤNG</b>


Trắc nghiệm


Trắc nghiệm Tự luậnTự luận Trắc Trắc
nghiệm


nghiệm Tự luậnTự luận TNTN Tự luậnTự luận


S.


S.


câu


câu ĐiểmĐiểm câu câu S.S. ĐiểĐiểmm câu câu S.S. ĐiểĐiểmm câu câu S.S. ĐiểmĐiểm câu câu S.S. ĐiểĐiểmm câu câu S.S. ĐiểĐiểmm Số câuSố câu


<b>Unit 1</b>


<b>Unit 1</b> - Tobe (present- Tobe (present



simple tense)


simple tense) <b> 22</b> 0.50.5 <b> 22</b> 1.01.0 <b> 22</b> <b>1.01.0</b> <b>66</b>


GREETI


GREETI


NGS


NGS - questions- questions<sub>-Vocabulary</sub><sub>-Vocabulary</sub> <b> 22</b><sub>1</sub><sub>1</sub> 0.5<b><sub>0.25 </sub></b>0.5<b><sub>0.25</sub></b> <b>22 </b> 1.01.0 <b>4<sub>1</sub>4<sub>1</sub></b>


<b>UNIT 2</b>


<b>UNIT 2</b> - imperative- imperative <b> 11</b> 0.250.25 <b>11</b>


At


At


school


school - This /That is...- This /That is...
- possessive


- possessive


pronoun


pronoun



<b> 11 </b> 0.250.25 <b>11</b>


- indefinite


- indefinite


articles: a/an


articles: a/an


- vocabulary


- vocabulary


- present


- present


simple tense


simple tense


<b>1</b>
<b>1</b>
<b> </b>


<b> 22</b>


0.25



0.25


0.5


0.5 <b>2</b>


<b>2</b> 1.01.0 <b>1212</b>


<b>2</b>
<b>2</b>
<b>UNIT 3</b>


<b>UNIT 3</b> -How many...?-How many...? <b> 11</b> 0.20.2


5


5 <b>11</b>


AT


AT


HOME


HOME -ThereThere are...-ThereThere are... is/is/ <b>22</b> 1.0 1.0 <b>22</b>
- numbers.


- numbers. <b>11</b> 0.20.2



5


5 <b>11</b>


- vocabulary


- vocabulary


- present


- present


simple tense


simple tense 22 <b>1.01.0</b>


1


1 <b>1.0 1.0</b> <b>11</b>
<b>2</b>
<b>2</b>


Tỉ lệ


Tỉ lệ


<b>10</b>


<b>10</b> <b>2.52.5</b> <b>66</b> <b>3.03.0</b> <b>99</b> <b>4.54.5</b> <sub>Số câu:25</sub><sub>Số câu:25</sub>



Số câu :


Số câu : <b>1010</b> <b><sub>25</sub><sub>25</sub></b>
<b>%</b>
<b>%</b>


Số câu :


Số câu : <b>66</b>
<b>30%</b>


<b>30%</b> Số câu :Số câu : 99 <b>45<sub>%</sub>45<sub>%</sub></b> Số điểm :10Số điểm :10


Số điểm :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

I. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 điểm)


I. Hãy chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5 điểm)


1 ... do you spell your name? (Where/ What/ How)


1 ... do you spell your name? (Where/ What/ How)


2. ……… your book. (Sit /Open / Stand)


2. ……… your book. (Sit /Open / Stand)


3. That is ……… eraser. (an / a / on)


3. That is ……… eraser. (an / a / on)



4. This is my brother. ...name is Long. (His/ My/ Her)


4. This is my brother. ...name is Long. (His/ My/ Her)


5. Tuan and Nga ……… students. (am/ is/ are)


5. Tuan and Nga ……… students. (am/ is/ are)


6. ……… are these? They are books. (Who/ How/ What)


6. ……… are these? They are books. (Who/ How/ What)


7. How many ……… are there in the classroom? (bench/ benches/ benchs)


7. How many ……… are there in the classroom? (bench/ benches/ benchs)


8. We are fine, ……… ( thanks you/ thank you/ thank)


8. We are fine, ……… ( thanks you/ thank you/ thank)


9. They live ……… Vietnam. (in/ on/ at)


9. They live ……… Vietnam. (in/ on/ at)


10……… that your pen? ( Am/ Is /Are)


10……… that your pen? ( Am/ Is /Are)


II/ Làm theo hướng dẫn trong ngoặc: (1,5điểm)



II/ Làm theo hướng dẫn trong ngoặc: (1,5điểm)


1. twenty-two x two = ... (viết kết quả bằng chữ)


1. twenty-two x two = ... (viết kết quả bằng chữ)


2. How many student are there in your class? (tìm lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng)


2. How many student are there in your class? (tìm lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng)




...


3. windows, students, benches, lamps, televisions, erasers, doors, clocks, couches, stereos. (sắp xếp


3. windows, students, benches, lamps, televisions, erasers, doors, clocks, couches, stereos. (sắp xếp


các từ bên vào đúng cột theo cách phát âm)


các từ bên vào đúng cột theo cách phát âm)




/s/ /iz/ /z//s/ /iz/ /z/


... ... ...


... ... ...



... ... ...


... ... ...


III/ Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau, rồi trả lời câu hỏi: (3 điểm)


III/ Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau, rồi trả lời câu hỏi: (3 điểm)


This is Nga’s family. There are four people in her family: her father, her mother, her brother and her.


This is Nga’s family. There are four people in her family: her father, her mother, her brother and her.


They live in a house. Her father is thirty-nine years old. He is doctor. Her mother is thirty years old.


They live in a house. Her father is thirty-nine years old. He is doctor. Her mother is thirty years old.


She is a teacher. Her brother is Hung. He is ten years old. Nga is thirteen years old. Nga and Hung are


She is a teacher. Her brother is Hung. He is ten years old. Nga is thirteen years old. Nga and Hung are


students.


students.


1. How old is Nga’s father? ...……...………


1. How old is Nga’s father? ...……...………


2. How old is her mother? ………...………



2. How old is her mother? ………...………


3. Is her mother a teacher? ……...………


3. Is her mother a teacher? ……...………


4. What does her brother do? ………...………...


4. What does her brother do? ………...………...


5. Are Nga and her brother ten? ………...


5. Are Nga and her brother ten? ………...


6. Where do they live? ………...


6. Where do they live? ………...


IV/Em hãy viết các câu để kể về bản thân mình theo các gợi ý sau: tên, tuổi, nghề nghiệp, nơi ở, số


IV/Em hãy viết các câu để kể về bản thân mình theo các gợi ý sau: tên, tuổi, nghề nghiệp, nơi ở, số


người trong gia đình, số học sinh trong lớp:(3điểm)


người trong gia đình, số học sinh trong lớp:(3điểm)




 ………





 ………




 ………




 ………


 ………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

Week: 7


Week: 7 <sub>Date of preparation:October 1st, 2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:October 1st, 2017</sub>


Period:19 Date of teaching : October 2nd, 2017
Period:19 Date of teaching : October 2nd, 2017


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i><b> Unit 4</b></i>

<b>Unit 4</b>

<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>

<b>: BIG OR SMALL?</b>


<b> Division of lessons</b>


<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2,3,4,6</b>
<b> Lesson 2: B1,2,3</b>
<b> Lesson 3: B4,5,6</b>
<b> Lesson 4: C1,2,3</b>
<b> Lesson 5: C4,5,6,7,8</b>


<b> </b>


---Lesson 1: A. where is your school? ( A1,2,3,4,6)
<b> </b>


<b>I. Objectives</b>


- After the lesson sts can + use the possessive “ ’s” .
+ describe their school, house ...
+ask and answer about quantity
<b>II. Content.</b>


- Vocabulary: country, big, small .
- Structure: where is Phong’s school ?


It’s in the country/ city.
It’s big/ small.


How many ... are there ...?
There are ...


<b>III/ TT echniques:echniques: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>IV/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, cassette, chalks, picture,


<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
<i>I_WARM UP : </i>


( CROSSWORD )


1- There are 47 students in my class
2- I am a student .


3- Open your book . .
4- Her father is a teacher .


5- There is a clock in my classroom .
6- I live in the country .


_Asks Ss to find out the key word. >>
SCHOOL


_Tells what is going on in the lesson :
_Tells what is going on in the lesson :


describing location and size of school.describing location and size of school.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON</i>:



1


1 CC LL AA SS SS


2


2 SS TT UU DD EE NN TT


3


3 BB OO OO KK


4


4 TT EE AA CC HH EE RR
5


5 CC LL OO CC KK


6


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Activity1
Activity1


T: Teach vocabulary :


Ss: Write them down



Read individuallyRead individually


T: Give T / F statement prediction :
T: Ask Ss to read these statements and
predict


each of them is true or false .
Ss: Pair work


3- T / F statements ( as shown above )
T: Ask Ss to read the text silently and do the
same T/F task as the one in the
pre-reading.


Ss: Work in pair
T: Correct


Activity2 : Comprehension questions
T: Ask Ss to read the text again and then
answer the questions.


Ss: Work in pair


T: Ask Ss to practice asking and answering
the


questions in front of the classroom
Ss: Open pair work



Activity3:


T: give T / F statement prediction :
T: Ask Ss to read these statements and
predict


each of them is true or false .
Ss: Pair work


<i>A1: </i>


<i>A1: Listen and repeat:Listen and repeat:</i>


big ( a ): lớn
small ( a ): nhỏ
or : hay, hoặc


in the country: ở miền quê/ nông thôn
in the city: ở thành phố


Which statements are
true ( T ) or false ( F )


Before
reading


After
reading
1-Phong’s school is in



the
city.


2-Phong’s school is
small.


3-Thu‘s school is in the
city


4-Thu ‘ s school is
small .


*Sở hữu cách của danh từ:


Khi muốn nói người/vật nào đó thuộc về ai
thì ta thêm “ ‘s” vào sau danh từ chỉ về người
ấy. Dtừ ấy gọi là danh từ ở sở hữu cách.
Ex: Phong’s school is small.


*Ex: It is small/ big


S + tobe + adj


Được dùng để miêu tả đặc điểm, tính chất
của người hoặc vật.


? Tobe + S ?


* Where + tobe + S?



Được dùng để hỏi về vị trí của người
hoặc vật.


A2: Answer. Then write the answers in
<i> your exercise book</i>
1. Yes, it is.


2. No, it isn’t.2. No, it isn’t.


3. It is in the country.3. It is in the country.
4. No, it isn’t.4. No, it isn’t.


<i>A3: </i>


<i>A3: Read. Then answer the questions.Read. Then answer the questions.</i>


Which statements are


true ( T ) r false
r false
( F )
( F )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

T / F statements ( as shown above )
T: Ask Ss to read the text silently and do the
same T/F task as the one


Ss: Work in pair
T: Correct



T: Ask Ss to read the text again and then
answer the questions.


Ss: Work in pair


T: Ask Ss to practice asking and answering
the


questions in front of the classroom
Ss: Open pair work


Activity4 : Comprehension questions
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions about
their


own school
Ss: Work in pair


T: Ask Ss to practice asking and answering
the


questions in front of the classroom
Ss: Open pair work


Before
reading
1-Phong’s school is in


the
city .



2-Phong’s school is
small .


3-There are eight
classrooms in Phong
’s


school .


4-There are two
hundred


students in his
school.


5-Thu‘s school is in the
city


6-Thu‘s school is
small.


7-There are twenty-five
classrooms in Thu‘s
school.


8-There are seven
hundred


students in her


school.


a) How many classrooms are there in
a) How many classrooms are there in
Phong’s


Phong’s


school ?school ?


There are 8 classrooms in Phong’s school.There are 8 classrooms in Phong’s school.
b) How many students are there in his school
b) How many students are there in his school
?


?


There are four hundred sts in his school.There are four hundred sts in his school.
c) How many classrooms are there in Thu’s
c) How many classrooms are there in Thu’s


school ?school ?


There are 20 classrooms in Thu’s school.
There are 20 classrooms in Thu’s school.
d) How many students are there in her school


d) How many students are there in her school
?


?


There are nine hundred sts in her school.
<i>A4: Answer. </i>


a) Is your school in the country or in the
city ?


My school is in the country.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to describe the location and size
of their school.


Ss: Group work


T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank in the passage
with the missing word.


Ss: Work in group


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>



T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


There are twenty classrooms .
c) How many students are there ?
There are eight hundred sts.


1-Where is Phong ’s school ?
2-Is Phong ’s school big ?


3-Is Thu ‘ s school in the city?
4-Is it big or small ?


<i>Fill in the blanks with the missing words </i>


<i>Fill in the blanks with the missing words </i>


<i> </i>


<i> </i> Phong ’s school is in the _____. It is Phong ’s school is in the _____. It is
_____ .


_____ .


There are _______ classrooms in his
school.


There are four hundred _____ in his school
.



Thu ’s school is in the ______ . It is _____
.


There are twenty ______ and nine
_______


students in her school.
*Homework:


*Homework:


- Write some sentences about your school.
- Write some sentences about your school.
- Do exercises: 1,2,3,4 in workbook.
- Do exercises: 1,2,3,4 in workbook.
VI. Comments:


VI. Comments:


********************************
********************************
Week: 7


Week: 7 <sub>Date of preparation:October 1st, 2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation:October 1st, 2017</sub>


Period:20 Date of teaching : October 3rd , 2017
Period:20 Date of teaching : October 3rd , 2017


Unit 4



Unit 4 : BIG OR SMALL ?: BIG OR SMALL ?
Lesson 2


Lesson 2: My class. (B1,2,3): My class. (B1,2,3)


<b>I. Objectives</b>


By the end of the period, students can
- ask and answer about grade and class.
- Describe their schools.


<b>II. Language contents</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>


Grade, floor, have


<b>2</b> <b>. Grammar</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

- Which class are you in?


<b>III. Techniques</b>


- Method: communicative approach


- Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>


English 6, cassette player, tape, things (available in class)



<b>V. </b>ProceduresProcedures


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up </b>


Ss: look at the picture in books (page
47) and answer some questions about
the number of floors and the position of
class 6A.


<b> </b>


<b>2. Presentation</b>


Ss: - listen to the tape twice
- read the dialogue loudly


T: explain some new words and write
them on the board.


Ss: repeat the new words after the
teacher.


Ss:- listen to the tape again and repeat.
- read in silence to get information


- play roles of Thu and Phong



- answer the questions about Thu and
Phong.


<b>3. Practice</b>


Ss: - complete the table.


- Questions and answers in Vietnamese
*New words


- grade (n) : khối lớp
- class (n) : lớp học
- floor (n) : tầng, lầu
- the first floor: tầng 1
- the second floor : tầng 2
- have/ has (v) : có


-Which grade is Thu / Phong in?
-Where is her / his classroom?


Grade class floor


Thu <b>7</b> <b>2nd</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

- write three sentences about them
(answer the questions)


<b>4.Production</b>


Ss: - work in pair, ask and answer about


themselves basing on the dialogue.
- some write their sentences on the
board.


<b>5. Homework</b>:


- which grade are you in?
- Which class are you in?
- Where is your classroom?


- Study new words and prepare Unit 4
(B.4,5)


VI. Comments


**********************************


**********************************


Date of preparation:October 2nd, 2017
Date of preparation:October 2nd, 2017
Date of teaching : October 4th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 4th , 2017
Period: 21/ Week:7


<b>UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL? </b>
<b> B.MY CLASS (4,5,6) </b>


<b>I. Objectives</b>



- By the end of the period, students can use the ordinal numbers from 1st<sub> to 10</sub>th


<b>II. Language contents</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>


First , second , third , fourth , fifth , sixth , seventh , eighth , ninth , tenth


<b>2</b> <b>. Grammar</b>


Review the previous grammar points


<b>III. Techniques</b>


- Method: communicative approach


- Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>


English 6, cassette player, tape, things (available in class)


<b>V. Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up </b>


Ss: sing the song “one to seven”


<b> 2. Presentation</b>



T: require students read the cardinal
numbers from one to twenty


T: introduce the ordinal numbers and


The Song


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

write them on the board.


T: tell the difference in using between
cardinal and ordinal numbers and give
examples.


Ss: repeat after the teacher. (choral and
individuals)


Ss: work in pair to complete the
dialogue in part B.5


T: ask students to read the words or
phrases they use to complete the dialogue.
Ss: - repeat the completed dialogue
after the teacher.


- some pairs play the roles of Thu
and Phong and read loudly.





<b>3. Practice</b>


<b> </b>Ss: work in group of four. Write 5


examples using the ordinal numbers and 5
examples using the cardinal numbers.


<b>4.Production</b>


Ss: have 3 minutes to prepare. Some
pairs of the students make new
dialogues like the one in part B.5
T: ask some more questions
Ss: answer the questions.


<b>5. Homework</b>:


1st<sub> 2</sub>nd<sub> 3</sub>rd<sub> 4</sub>th<sub> 5</sub>th
First Second Third Fourth Fifth
6th<sub> 7</sub>th<sub> 8</sub>th<sub> 9</sub>th<sub> 10</sub>th
Sixth Seventh Eighth Ninth Tenth
Ex: My School Has 3 Floors.


This Is The Second Floor.
B.5


- No. It’s small
- does


- has


- are
- am
- is
- on


Write examples
Dialogue


S1: Is your school big?
S2: No/yes.


S1:…………
S2:…………
Questions:


- How many floors does your school have?
- Where is your classroom?


-Which grade are you in?
- Which class are you in?


- Study new words and prepare Unit 4
(C. 1,2,3)


VI.Comments:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Date of preparation:October 7th, 2017
Date of preparation:October 7th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 9th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 9th , 2017


Period: 22/ Week:8


<b>UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL</b>
<b>C.Getting ready for school (1,2,3)</b>
<b>I. Objectives:</b>


<b>- </b>By the end of the period, students can ask and answer about daily activities.


<b>II. Language contents</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary</b>


Get up, have (breakfast) , wash , get dressed , brush , go to school


<b>2</b> <b>. Grammar</b>


- What do you do every morning?
- I get up.


<b>III. Techniques</b>


- Method: communicative approach


- Skills: listening, speaking, reading, writing


<b>IV. Teaching aids</b>


English 6, cassette player, tape, things (available in class)


<b>V. Procedures</b>



<b>Teacher’s and students’ activities</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b>1. Warm up </b>


Ss: say some activities they do every
day.


<b> 2. Presentation</b>


Ss: - listen to the tape twice and then
repeat the sentences.


Ss: - look at the picture and answer
what Ba is doing ( in Vietnamese)


T: help them understand new words and
write them on the board.


Ss: repeat the new words after the
teacher. (choral and individuals)


Ss: listen to the tape and repeat once
more.


activities in vietnamese.
<i>C1: </i>


<i>C1: Listen and repeat:Listen and repeat:</i>
_ get up ( v ) : thức dậy


_ get dressed (v) : mặc đồ
_ brush … teeth : đánh răng


_ tooth ( n ) chiếc răng .>teeth (pl.n )
_ wash … face :rửa mặt


_ have breakfast : ăn sáng
_ go to school : đi học
_ breakfast (n): bữa ăn sáng
_


_ gogo (v): đi (v): đi
_


_ dodo (v) : làm ( (v) : làm ( <i>translationtranslation</i> ) )
_


_ everyevery : mỗi ( : mỗi ( <i>translation ) translation</i> )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>



T: help students understand the questions
with ordinary verbs and give examples.
Ss: pay attentions to the ordinary verbs
in affirmative sentences with the third –
singular subjects


<b>3. Practice</b>


<b> </b>Ss: - work in pair. Ask and answer the



questions in part C2


- work in group of four. Write five
sentences about Ba. Begin with:


Every morning, Ba gets up. He…


<b>4.Production</b>


Ss: - write their sentences on the board
- some read loudly


<b> 5. Homework</b>:






Ba


Ba getsgets up He up He getsgets dressed dressed
I


I brushbrush my teeth I my teeth I <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>washwash my face my face


He


He brushesbrushes his teeth He his teeth He washeswashes his face his face



I


I havehave breakfast I breakfast I <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>gogo to school to school


He


He hashas breakfast He breakfast He goesgoes to school to school


C2:


C2: <i>Practice with a partner:Practice with a partner:</i>


What do you do every morning?
What do you do every morning?
I get up. Then I ……….
I get up. Then I ……….
C3:


C3: <i>Write:Write:</i>


Every morning, Ba gets up . He …………
Every morning, Ba gets up . He …………


- He brushes his teeth.
- He has breakfast.


- What do you do every morning?
- I…………


- Study new words and prepare Unit


4 (C. 4,5,6,7,8)


VI.Comments:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Date of preparation:October 7th, 2017
Date of preparation:October 7th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 9th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 9th , 2017
Period: 23/ Week:8


Unit 4


Unit 4 : BIG OR SMALL ?: BIG OR SMALL ?
Lesson 5


Lesson 5: Getting ready for school. (C4,5,6,7,8): Getting ready for school. (C4,5,6,7,8)
I


I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask for and say the time, use Wh- ask for and say the time, use
Wh-question with


question with What timeWhat time..
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : What time is it?


What time do you get up? / What time does Ba get up?
b Vo: review cardinal numbers, half past, at . eview cardinal numbers, half past, at .



III/ TTechniques:echniques: Group work , pairwork, individual work. Group work , pairwork, individual work.
IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
<i>1_WARM UP : </i>


T: Ask students to answer the question :
“What do you do every morning ?”


<i>2._</i>


<i>2._NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
Activity1Activity1::


T: Show the picture(page 50) and ask Ss to
T: Show the picture(page 50) and ask Ss to
guess


guess


the actionsthe actions
Ss: Whole class
Ss: Whole class


T: Read the dialogue and ask Ss to repeat


T: Read the dialogue and ask Ss to repeat
Ss: Repeat in chorus


Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to perform in
T: Call on some pairs of Ss to perform in
front


front


of the classof the class


<i>C4: </i>


<i>C4: Listen and repeatListen and repeat..</i>


<i>Then practice the dialogue with a partner</i>


<i>Then practice the dialogue with a partner</i>





Nga: What time is it ?
Nga: What time is it ?


Ba: It’s eight o’clock. We’re late for school.Ba: It’s eight o’clock. We’re late for school.
C5:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

Activity2
Activity2::


T: Show two groups of cardinal numbers
(review)




T: Tell what is going on in the lesson : asking
for and saying the time .


T: Present structures + vocabulary:


( picture + example )
T: Read the time and ask Ss to repeat (use the
picture cues)


Ss: Repeat in chorus


T: Asks Ss to ask for and say the time
Ss: Work in pair
Activity3Activity3::


T: Ask Ss to group these phrases into their
<i> topic:</i>


Ss: Group work


T: Ask Ss to read the text and then answer the


questions.


Activity4
Activity4::


T: Let Ss to write about themselves answering
the questions below:


<i>3_ </i>


<i>3_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


<i>4. </i>


<i>4. HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


@ one – two – three – four – five – six –
seven –


eight – nine – ten – eleven – twelve


@ five – ten – fifteen – twenty – twenty-five



thirty – thirty-five – forty –forty-five – fifty


fifty-five


What time is it ? : Mấy giờ rồi?
1_It’s ten o’clock.
2_ It’s ten thirty.
Notes:


<i>Nói giờ đúng: It’s + giờ + o’clock.</i>
<i>Nói giờ hơn: It’s + giờ + phút .</i>
<i>Nói giờ rưỡi: It’s + half past + giờ.</i>


@ half = thirty , quarter = fifteen @ half = thirty , quarter = fifteen
<i>C6: Read.</i>


@ Goup in to their topic


go to school seven fifteen
get up six o’clock
have breakfast thirty past six


At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)
1_What time does Ba get up ?
He gets up at six.



2_What time does he have breakfast ?
He has breakfast at six thirty.


3_ What time does he go to school ?
He goes to school at seven fifteen.


<i>C7: </i>


<i>C7: Answer about you.Answer about you.</i>


<i>a)</i> What time do you get up ?


<i>b)</i> What time do you have breakfast ?
<i>c)</i> What time do you go to school ?




 Homework:Homework:


Write 5 sentences about the time: 6.00 – 1.30
Write 5 sentences about the time: 6.00 – 1.30
– 2.50 – 4.35 – 7.15


– 2.50 – 4.35 – 7.15


Do exercises: 3,4,5,6 in workbook.
Do exercises: 3,4,5,6 in workbook.
VI.Comments:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

*********************************


*********************************


Date of preparation:October 10th, 2017
Date of preparation:October 10th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 11th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 11th , 2017
Period: 24/ Week:8


<b>CORRECTION THE TEST</b>
<b>CORRECTION THE TEST</b>
I/ Objectives:


I/ Objectives:


At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present (tobe).
At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present (tobe).
II/ Language content:


II/ Language content:


the simple present (tobe), Wh-words.
the simple present (tobe), Wh-words.
III/ Teaching aids


III/ Teaching aids: chalk, board, test.: chalk, board, test.
IV/ Procedures


IV/ Procedures: :


<b>T’s and Sts’ activities:</b>



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities:</b> <b>Contents:Contents:</b>


1.


1. Presentation:Presentation:


T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
Sts: Look at their test papers.


Sts: Look at their test papers.
T: Revise and correct.


T: Revise and correct.
Sts: Listen.


Sts: Listen.


T: Ask sometimes.
T: Ask sometimes.
Sts: Answer.
Sts: Answer.
T: Summarize.
T: Summarize.
Sts: Take notes.
Sts: Take notes.


A/



A/ Grammar:Grammar:
1.


1.<i>The present simple tense (to be): Am/ is/ The present simple tense (to be):</i> Am/ is/
are


are
I am
I am


We/ you/ they are
We/ you/ they are
He/ she/ it is
He/ she/ it is


<i>2.</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>Imperative (commands)Imperative (commands)</i>


V-bare inf + OV-bare inf + O
Ex: Open your book.
Ex: Open your book.


<i>3.</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>This/ That is . . .This/ That is . . .</i>


This /That is + sing. N
This /That is + sing. N



Ex: This is a book./ That is a pen.
Ex: This is a book./ That is a pen.


<i>4.</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>Indefinite articles:Indefinite articles:</i>


A: đứng trước một phụ âm.
A: đứng trước một phụ âm.
An: đứng trước một nguyên âm.
An: đứng trước một nguyên âm.
Ex: This is a ruler./ That is an eraser.
Ex: This is a ruler./ That is an eraser.


<i>5.</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>How many . . .?How many . . .?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

there . . . ?
there . . . ?


Ex: How many students are there in your
Ex: How many students are there in your
class?


class?


6. 6. <i>There is/ are. . .There is/ are. . .</i>





There is + sing. NThere is + sing. N


There are + pl. nThere are + pl. n


Ex: There is a table in my class/There are
Ex: There is a table in my class/There are
ten pens


ten pens
B/
B/ Keys:Keys:


I/ 1.How 2.Open 3.an 4.His 5.are
I/ 1.How 2.Open 3.an 4.His 5.are
6.What 7.benches 8.thank you 9.in
6.What 7.benches 8.thank you 9.in
10.Is


10.Is


II/ 1. forty-four 2.student students
II/ 1. forty-four 2.student students
3. /s/: students, lamps, clocks


3. /s/: students, lamps, clocks
/iz/ : benches, couches
/iz/ : benches, couches



/z/:windows,televitions, erasers, doors,
/z/:windows,televitions, erasers, doors,
stereos III/ 1.He/ Her father is forty-nine
stereos III/ 1.He/ Her father is forty-nine
years old.


years old.


2.She/ Her mother is thirty years old
2.She/ Her mother is thirty years old
3.Yes, she is.


3.Yes, she is.


4.Her brother/ He is a student.
4.Her brother/ He is a student.
5.No, they aren’t.


5.No, they aren’t.
6.They live in a house.
6.They live in a house.
IV/ Ex: I am….tên….
IV/ Ex: I am….tên….


I am ….số tuổi….I am ….số tuổi….


I am student.I am student.




I live ………I live ………


There are ……. people in my There are ……. people in my
family.


family.


There are ……..students in my There are ……..students in my
class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Date of preparation:October 15th, 2017
Date of preparation:October 15th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 16th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 16th , 2017
Period: 25/ Week:9


<b>Unit 5</b>


<b>Unit 5 : THINGS I DO: THINGS I DO</b>
Division of lessons
Lesson 1: A1,2,3
Lesson 2: A4,5,6,7
Lesson 3: B1,4
Lesson 4: B2,3,4
Lesson 5: C1,2,3,4



...
...


Lesson 1


Lesson 1: My day (A1-2-3): My day (A1-2-3)
I


I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask –answer or write daily activities of ask –answer or write daily activities of
Nga and of them.


Nga and of them.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : What does Nga do every day?
What do you do very day?


b Vo: review U4-C1, watch TV, do the housework, play games, listen to music, do eview U4-C1, watch TV, do the housework, play games, listen to music, do
homework.


homework.


III/ TTechniques:echniques: Group work , pairwork, individual work. Group work , pairwork, individual work.
IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<i>1.</i>


<i>1.WARM UPWARM UP :</i>:<i> </i>


T: Ask Ss to answer the questions and put the
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions and put the


words in to the correct order to make the words in to the correct order to make the


meaningful sentencemeaningful sentence
S: Answer


S: Answer


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson : talkingtalking
about everyday habits


about everyday habits


<i>2._</i>


<i>2._NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
Activity1Activity1::


T: Teach vocabulary:
T: Read the new words


Ss: Listen and repeat


T: Write the new words on the board
Ss: Write them down


Read individually


Checking vocabulary : (matching)


T: Explain


T: Ask Ss to match the parts to make a
sentence.


Ss: Pair work


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat sentence by
sentence.


Ss: Repeat in chorus


Activity2:


T: Ask Ss to read the text silently for details.
Ss: Read in silence and find the answers to the
questions


T: Ask Ss to check the answers after reading
the



1_What time do you get up ?


2_ school /six /Lan / at /goes / past / to / half .


<i>A1: Listen and repeat. Then practice …</i>
* Vocabulary:


_ play (v): chơi (picture+example)
_ game (n) : trò chơi (picture+example)
e.g. : I play games every afternoon .
_ homework (n): BTVN (translation)
_ day (n) : ngày (translation)


_ after : sau ( translation )
_ watch (v): xem ( picture )


_ watch television : xem tivi ( picture )
<i> _ listen to (v): nghe ( picture ) </i>


_ music (n) : nhạc (translation )


_ housework (n): công việc nhà(translation )
_ read (v): đọc (translation )


The present simple tense:
The present simple tense:


a.


a. Use:To express a habit.Use:To express a habit.


b.


b. Form:Form:
KĐ:


KĐ:


+ S + V-bare inf . .
+ S + V-bare inf . .
.


.


(I/We/You/They…)(I/We/You/They…)


Ex: I go to schoolEx: I go to school


They go to school. They go to school.


+ S + V-s/es . . .
+ S + V-s/es . . .


(He/ She/It . . . )(He/ She/It . . . )







<i>A2: </i>


<i>A2: Look at A1 again. Ask and answerLook at A1 again. Ask and answer … …</i>
a- She gets up at six every day.


b- She goes to school every morning
c- She plays games every afternoon.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

text once more.
Activity3:


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat sentence by
sentence.


Ss: Repeat in chorus.


T: Ask Ss to practice the dialogue.
Ss: Open pair work.


.


<i>3_ </i>


<i>3_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to write what they do every
morning/



afternoon/evening


<i>4. </i>


<i>4. HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


<i>A3: Listen and repeat. Then practice …</i>
<i> What do you do after school ?</i>


Ba Lan


Nam Thu


Phong: What do you do after school , Ba?
Ba : I


………...
Phong: What do you do after school , Lan?
Lan : I


………
Phong : What do you do after school , Nam?
Nam : I


………
Phong : What do you do after school , Thu?
Thu :I Thu :I



………
………




 Homework:Homework:


-Learn the lesson carefully.
-Learn the lesson carefully.


-Do exercises: 1,2,3 in workbook.
-Do exercises: 1,2,3 in workbook.


-Write about their after school activities.
-Write about their after school activities.
-Prepare parts A5,6,7


-Prepare parts A5,6,7




VI.Comments:


………
………..


***************************


***************************



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

Period: 26/ Week:9


Unit 5


Unit 5 : THINGS I DO.: THINGS I DO.
Lesson 2


Lesson 2: My day (A4,5,6,7): My day (A4,5,6,7)
I


I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask –answer about after school activities of ask –answer about after school activities of
Lan, Thu and of them.


Lan, Thu and of them.
II/ Language contents:


a. Grammar : Do you play soccer after school?. Yes, I do . / No, I don’t.Do you play soccer after school?. Yes, I do . / No, I don’t.


Does she play soccer? Yes, she does./ No, she doesn’t.


b Vo: review : watch TV, do the housework, play games, listen to music, do homework.eview : watch TV, do the housework, play games, listen to music, do homework.


Play soccer/ volleyball/ badminton/ table tennis, girl, boy, sports.Play soccer/ volleyball/ badminton/ table tennis, girl, boy, sports.
III/ TTechniques:echniques: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.



IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures,
V/ Procedures:


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents
<i>1._WARM UP:</i>


<i>1-T: Ask Ss to write each sentence under each</i>
picture of activity after school.


Ss: Write (3 Ss)
<i>Brainstorming</i>


T: Show the pictures and asks Ss to guess the
topic of the lesson.


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
continue


continue talking about after school activities.talking about after school activities.


<i>2._</i>


<i>2._NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
Activity1Activity1::


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and then



answer the questions in A4answer the questions in A4


T: Teach vocabulary.


Checking vocabulary : (matching)


Presentation of the new structure:
Dialogue Build:






<i>A4: </i>


<i>A4: Answer.Answer.</i>


a)


a) What does Lan do after school?What does Lan do after school?
Lan does the housework.


Lan does the housework.
b)


b) What does Ba do after school?What does Ba do after school?


Ba watches TVBa watches TV


c)


c) What does Thu do after school?What does Thu do after school?
Thu reads.


Thu reads.
d)


d) What does Nam do after school?What does Nam do after school?
Nam listens to music.


Nam listens to music.


<i>A5: </i>


<i>A5: Listen and repeat. Then practiceListen and repeat. Then practice … . …</i> .





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

T: Ask Ss to put the sentences into their
correct


order to make a dialogue.
Ss: Work in pair.


T: Ask Ss to read the dialogue in A5 and
compare it with their dialogue.


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence


in


the dialogue.
Ss: Whole class.


T: Ask Ss to practise the dialogue.
Ss: Pairwork.


Activity2:


T: Have Ss work in pairs , asking about
his/her




classmate’s after-school activity classmate’s after-school activity
Ss: Work in pair ( Yes/ No Questions)
Ss: Work in pair ( Yes/ No Questions)


Activity3
Activity3::


T: Consolidate the grammar notes
T: Consolidate the grammar notes
Ss: Listen and get


Activity 4
Activity 4::


<i>3._ </i>



<i>3._ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to write what they do after school
Ss: Individually


Ss: Individually


<i>4: </i>


<i>4: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


_ table-tennis(n): bóng bàn (picture)
_ _ sportssports(n):thể thao ((n):thể thao (<i>network )network </i>)
_ _ girlgirl(n):nữ (n):nữ <i>(picture)(picture)</i>


<i>_ </i>


<i>_ boy</i>boy<i>(n):nam(n):</i>nam<i>(picture)(picture)</i>


<i> @Note: Yes-no questions </i>


<i>Hỏi _Do/ Does + S + V-bare </i>
<i>inf . . .?</i>


<i>Trả lời: _ Yes, S + do/does. </i>


<i> </i>


<i> _ _ NoNo, S + don’t/, S + don’t/doesn’t.doesn’t. </i>



1_ What do you and Nga do after school ?
2_ Yes , they do .


3_ Does Nga play soccer ?
4_ They play soccer


5_ Do you play soccer ?
6_ Do girls play soccer?
7_ We play volleyball.
8_ No , I don’t.


9_What do Thu and Vui do ?
10_ No , she doesn’t.


<i>A6: </i>


<i>A6: Listen and answer. Say Yes,I do or No, I Listen and answer. Say Yes,I do or No, I </i>
<i>don’t</i>


<i>don’t</i>


<i>a) Do you play sports ?</i>


<i>a) Do you play sports ?</i>


<i>b) Do you watch television ?</i>


<i>b) Do you watch television ?</i>



<i>c) Do you do the housework ?</i>


<i>c) Do you do the housework ?</i>


<i>d) Do you play volleyball ?</i>


<i>d) Do you play volleyball ?</i>


<i>e) Do you listen to music ?</i>


<i>e) Do you listen to music ?</i>


<i>f) Do you read ?</i>


<i>f) Do you read ?</i>


<i>g) Do you do your homework ?</i>


<i>g) Do you do your homework ?</i>
A7:


A7: <i>Remember.Remember.</i>


<i>I, We, You,They play/watch/do</i>
<i>He, She plays/ watches/ does</i>


<i>Do you play soccer? Yes, I do</i>


<i>Do you play soccer? Yes, I do</i>



<i> </i>


<i> No, I don’t. I don’t play No, I don’t. I don’t play </i>


<i>soccer.</i>


<i>soccer.</i>


<i>*</i>


<i>*Homework:Homework:</i>


-Learn the lesson carefully.
-Learn the lesson carefully.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


T: Remark the lesson and give homework. - Prepare parts B1,2.- Prepare parts B1,2.
VI.Comments:


---...
...




---Date of preparation:October 16th, 2017


Date of preparation:October 16th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 18th , 2017
Date of teaching : October 18th , 2017


Period: 27/ Week:9


<b>Unit 5</b>



<b>Unit 5</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO.</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO.</b>



<b>Lesson 3</b>


<b>Lesson 3: My routine (B1-4): My routine (B1-4)</b>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to read and understand the passage about daily read and understand the passage about daily
activities of Ba.


activities of Ba.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : present simple tense present simple tense


b Vo: take a shower ,eat, have classes, from… to, a quarter to/past half, have lunch, gotake a shower ,eat, have classes, from… to, a quarter to/past half, have lunch, go
home , go to bed , start


home , go to bed , start finish. finish.


<b>III/ T echniquesTechniques :: </b> pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


<b>IV/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures,


<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to complete the network


T: Ask the student to answer some questions
about after-school activities.


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson : tellingtelling
about Ba’s routine.


about Ba’s routine.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON</i>:
Activity1Activity1::


have breakfast get up play games
go to school watch
television



do homework listen to music



<i>B1: </i>


<i>B1: Read.Read.</i>






</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

T: Teach vocabulary.


Checking vocabulary : (matching)


T: Open the EZ Talk and ask Ss to listen
twice


Ss: Listen


T: Call on some students to read the dialogue
Ss: Read individually


Activity2:


T: Explain the grammar notes


Ss: Listen and copy on their notebook


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>



T: Explain the notes


Ss: Listen and copy on their notebook


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.






_ take a shower : tắm bằng vòi hoa sen
(picture)


_ have classes : có các tiết học .
_from … to…(example)


<i>e.g.: I have classes from seven to quarter past </i>
eleven.


_have lunch : ăn trưa (example)


e.g.: Every day , I have breakfast at six
and have lunch at half past eleven.
_eat(v): (explanation + example)
>I eat lunch / have lunch at eleven.


_ go home : về nhà (example)


>After school,I go home and eat lunch.
_go to bed : đi ngủ (example)


>I go to bed at ten o’clock every evening .
_start  finish(v): bắt đầu  kết thúc


<i>e.g.: Classes start at seven and finish at eleven.</i>
B4: Remember.


*Cách nói giờ chẵn:
*Cách nói giờ chẵn:


It’s + Giờ + o’clockIt’s + Giờ + o’clock
Eg: It’s ten o’clock
Eg: It’s ten o’clock


<i>* </i>


<i>* Cách nói giờ hơn:</i>Cách nói giờ hơn:


<i> </i>


<i> It’s + phút + past + giờIt’s + phút + past + giờ</i>
<i>Eg: It’s a quarter past ten</i>


<i>Eg: It’s a quarter past ten</i>



<i> </i>


<i> It’s ten fifteenIt’s ten fifteen</i>
<i>* </i>


<i>* Cách nói giờ kém:</i>Cách nói giờ kém:


<i> </i>


<i> It’s + phút + to + giờ It’s + phút + to + giờ </i>
<i>Eg: It’s a quarter to ten</i>


<i>Eg: It’s a quarter to ten</i>


<i> </i>


<i> = It’s nine forty-five = It’s nine forty-five </i>


* S + V-bare inf . . .
* S + V-bare inf . . .
(I/ We/ You/ They)


(I/ We/ You/ They)


S + V-s/es . . .S + V-s/es . . .


(He / She/ It)(He / She/ It)



<i>*Homework: </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

Learn by heart the vocabulary and the
grammar .


Do exercise: 1 in workbook.
VI.Comments:


---...
...


************************************


Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of teaching : October 23rd , 2017
Date of teaching : October 23rd , 2017
Period: 28/ Week:10


<b>Unit 5</b>



<b>Unit 5</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO</b>

..
<b>Lesson 4</b>


<b>Lesson 4: My routine (B2-3-4): My routine (B2-3-4)</b>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask and answer about Ba’s and their ask and answer about Ba’s and their


friends’daily activities; write about Ba’s and their daily activities.


friends’daily activities; write about Ba’s and their daily activities.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : What time does he get up/ do you get up? What time does he get up/ do you get up?
b Vo: review B1,2. review B1,2.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>IV/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_Warm up:</i>


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures and talk
about Ba


Ss: Look at the pictures and talk about Ba


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PresentationPresentation::</i>


Activity1:


chart completion ( as shown above )
<i>T: Ask Ss to read the text silently and check </i>
<i>the</i>



<i> chart completed .</i>
<i>Ss: Work in pair</i>


Activity2:


<i>a) Comprehension questions</i>


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and then
<i> answer the questions.</i>


<i>Ss: Work in pairs </i>


<i>T: Call on some pairs of Ss to perform</i>
<i>Ss: Open pairs</i>








<i>B2: Complete the table </i>
<i>…</i>


<i>@ </i>


<i>@ Note:Note:</i>


<i>Eg: It’s ten past seven =</i>



<i>Eg: It’s ten past seven =</i>


<i>It’s seven ten</i>


<i>It’s seven ten</i>


<i>Eg: It’s twenty – five to </i>


<i>Eg: It’s twenty – five to </i>


<i>three = It’s two thirty –</i>


<i>three = It’s two thirty –</i>


<i>five </i>


<i>five </i>


<i>B3: Practice with a </i>
<i>partner …</i>


a)1_What time does Ba
get up ?


2_ What time does he
go to school ?


3_ What time do his classes start ?
4_ What time do his classes finish?


5_ What time does he have lunch?
6_ What time does he go home?
7_ What time does he go to bed?
b.1_What time do you get up ?
2_What time do you go to school ?
<i> 3_What time do your classes start?</i>
4_What time do your classes finish?
5_What time do you have lunch ?
6_What time do you go home?
7_What time do you go to bed ?
B4: Remember.


*Cách nói giờ chẵn:
*Cách nói giờ chẵn:


It’s + Giờ + o’clockIt’s + Giờ + o’clock
Eg: It’s ten o’clock
Eg: It’s ten o’clock


<i>* </i>


<i>* Cách nói giờ hơn:</i>Cách nói giờ hơn:


ROUTINE TIME


Ba You


get up
go to


school
classes
start
classes
finish
have
lunch
go home
go to
bed


6.00


………
………
……….….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

Activity3:


T: Explain the grammar notes


Ss: Listen and copy on their notebook


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


<i>T: Ask Ss to look at the chart and talk about </i>
Ba



<i>Ss: Pair work</i>


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


<i> </i>


<i> It’s + phút + past + giờIt’s + phút + past + giờ</i>


<i>Eg: It’s a quarter past ten</i>


<i>Eg: It’s a quarter past ten</i>


<i> </i>


<i> It’s ten fifteenIt’s ten fifteen</i>
<i>* </i>


<i>* Cách nói giờ kém:</i>Cách nói giờ kém:


<i> </i>


<i> It’s + phút + to + giờ It’s + phút + to + giờ </i>
<i>Eg: It’s a quarter to ten</i>


<i>Eg: It’s a quarter to ten</i>



<i> </i>


<i> = It’s nine forty-five = It’s nine forty-five </i>
* S + V-bare inf . . .
* S + V-bare inf . . .
(I/ We/ You/ They)


(I/ We/ You/ They)


S + V-s/es . . .S + V-s/es . . .


(He / She/ It)(He / She/ It)
*Homework:
*Homework:


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.


Do exercises: 2,3,4 in workbook.
Do exercises: 2,3,4 in workbook.


VI.Comments:


---...
...


**********************************


**********************************


Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of teaching : October 24th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 24th, 2017
Period: 29/ Week:10


<b>Unit 5</b>



<b>Unit 5</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO.</b>

<b>: THINGS I DO.</b>



<b>Lesson 5:</b>


<b>Lesson 5: Classes (C1,2,3,4) Classes (C1,2,3,4)</b>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to ask and answer about timetable (subjects ask and answer about timetable (subjects
which they learnt).


which they learnt).
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>IV/ Teaching aids : textbook, cassette, chalks, pictures, </b>
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>



<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


_ Asks Ss to complete the crossword
_ Aks Ss to find out the key word from the
crossword.


_Shows the pictures and asks Ss to guess the
topic of the lesson.


_Tells what is going on in the lesson :
_Tells what is going on in the lesson :
describing school timetables.


describing school timetables.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Teach new words
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat


Checking vocabulary : (What and Where)
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence
in the text.


Ss: Repeat in chorus



T: Ask Ss to practise the dialogue
Ss: Pair work


Ordering vocabulary:


T: Give the words ( history, English, Tuesday,
math , geography, literature), Read a passage
and ask Ss to listen and number correctly after
each word


Ss: listen and number




<i>key word:key word</i>: TIMETABLE TIMETABLE


C1:


C1: <sub> </sub><i>Listen and repeat.Listen and repeat</i>.








_ _ mathmath literature literature history history
geography



geography


_ today (n): hôm nay(translation)
_ Monday (n): thứhai (timetable)
_ English (n): Tiếng Anh (realia)


_ timetable (n) TKB (_ timetable (n) TKB (<i>realia)realia</i>)


_Today is Tuesday. First I have literature.
Then


I have English . At twenty to ten we have
math


and then we have history. At half past ten we
have geography.


Answer Key:


history_5 ,English_3 , Tuesday_1,
math_4 ,geography_6 , literature_2


M


M AA TT HH
H


H II SS TT OO RR YY


L


L II TT EE RR AA TT UU RR EE
T


T UU EE SS DD AA YY
S


S UU BB JJ EE CC TT SS
E


E NN GG LL II SS HH
G


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Activity2:


1-Pre-teach vocabulary:
1-Pre-teach vocabulary:
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat


T: Write the new words on the board
Ss: Write them down


Read individually


2-Checking vocabulary : (What and Where)


3-Predict Dialogue:



T: Give a dialogue on a poster ,ask Ss to read
and predict the words in the blanks


Ss: Read and predict


Nga : What day is it today ?
Nam : It is Monday .


Nga : What subjects do you have today?
Nam : I have literature, English , math ,
history and geography


Nga : What time does English start ?
Nam : It starts at <i> fifteen to eight .</i>
Note


Note


1) What do/does + S + have + today /on +
1) What do/does + S + have + today /on +
thứ?


thứ?


S + have / has + tên môn họcS + have / has + tên môn học


2) When + do/does + S + have + tên môn học?
2) When + do/does + S + have + tên môn học?



S +have/has …. from …… to ……./at
S +have/has …. from …… to ……./at
……….


……….


<i>C2: </i>


<i>C2: Listen and repeat.Listen and repeat</i>.


_ week : tuần ( example )
_ When : khi nào( example


Nga: What subjects do you have today ?
Ba : I have English , math , history and
biology .


Nga: When do you have literature ?


Ba : I have it on Monday , Wednesday and
Friday .


Nga: Do you have geography on Thursday ?
Ba : No , I don’t . I have it on Saturday .
Nga : When do you have physics ?


Ba : I have it today , on Tuesday .


<i>C3: </i>



<i>C3: Listen and repeatListen and repeat</i>


Nga: When do we have history ?
Nga: When do we have history ?


Ba: We have it on Tuesday and Thursday.
Ba: We have it on Tuesday and Thursday.
Nga: When do we have history ?


Nga: When do we have history ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

T: Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue and check
the words they guess.


Ss: Listen and check


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence in
the dialogue.


Activity3:


T: Read the dialogue and ask Ss to listen
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat each sentence in
the dialogue.


Ss: listen and repeat in chorus
T: Asks Ss to practise the dialogue
<i>Ss: Close pair work </i>


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to practice the


dialogue in front of the class


Ss: Open pair work
T:Remind


Sts:pay attention


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Have Ss ask for and tell about their
timetable


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.
T: Remark the lesson and give homework.




FridayFriday


Nga: Does Lan have math on Friday ?
Nga: Does Lan have math on Friday ?
Ba: No , she doesn’t.


Ba: No , she doesn’t.



C4,


C4,<i>RememberRemember</i>


*Homework:
*Homework:
Learn


Learn the lesson carefully.the lesson carefully.


Do exercises: 2,3,4 in workbook.
Do exercises: 2,3,4 in workbook.
VI.Comments:


---...
...


Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of preparation:October 22nd, 2017
Date of teaching : October 25th, 2017
Date of teaching : October 25th, 2017
Period: 30/ Week:10


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>



<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>



<b>I</b>



<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to review what they’ve learnt from unit 3 to unit review what they’ve learnt from unit 3 to unit
5.


5.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

a. Grammar : present simple tense, Qs words, adjectives.present simple tense, Qs words, adjectives.
b Vo: help, end. help, end.


<b>III/ TT echniquesechniques :</b>: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.
<b>IV/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to match the items in A
with the ones in B


Ss: Read and match


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Review the simple present tense


Ss: Listen and coppy down.


T: Get Ss to fill in the gaps and
T: Get Ss to fill in the gaps and


answer the questionsanswer the questions
Ss: Work in pairs .
Ss: Work in pairs .


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
practice


practice


in front of the classin front of the class
Ss: Open pairwork
Ss: Open pairwork
Activity2Activity2: :


T: Get Ss to retell the numbers and
T: Get Ss to retell the numbers and
the


the


way of saying the time.way of saying the time.



T: Get Ss to work in pairs , ask and
answer the time.


Ss: Work in pair.


Activity3:


T: Get Ss to answer the questions
T: Get Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Close pair


Ss: Close pair


T: Ask Ss to work in pairs before the
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs before the


classclass




A B


Listen to
Get


At
Play
Have



On
Go to
Watch


Read
Do


Six o’clock
Volleyball


History
Music
Television
The housework


Book
Friday
School
Up


1. Present simple tense


I / We / you / They / N(pl) + V bare inf………I / We / you / They / N(pl) + V bare inf………


He / She / It / N(sing) + VHe / She / It / N(sing) + Vs/es ... ...s/es ... ...





Do / Does + S + V ………?Do / Does + S + V ………?




 S1: askS1: ask
S2: answer


a. get- get- get- gets- get- get


b. do- have –have- does – have- has – do – have – have
c. do- go – go – do- go – go – does- go – goes


d. Do- wash – wash – Does- wash – washes
2.


2. TimeTime


What time is it?What time is it?


It’s + số giờ + o’clock.It’s + số giờ + o’clock.


It’s + số giờ + số phútIt’s + số giờ + số phút
a.


a. It’s seven o’clockIt’s seven o’clock
b.



b. It’s nine fìfteenIt’s nine fìfteen
c.


c. It’s four thirtyIt’s four thirty
d.


d. It’s twelve o’clockIt’s twelve o’clock
e.


e. It’s one forty - fiveIt’s one forty - five
f. It’s eight fifty
3.


3. AdjectivesAdjectives


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

T: Get feedback
T: Get feedback
Activity4:


Activity4:


T: Get Ss to resay the Question
T: Get Ss to resay the Question
words


words


and their meaningand their meaning


Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


T: Ask Ss to fill in the gaps with the
T: Ask Ss to fill in the gaps with the


suitable Queston wordssuitable Queston words
Ss: Work in pair


Ss: Work in pair
Activity5:


Activity5:


T: Have Ss answer about the classes
Ss: Work in pair


Activity6:
Activity6:


T: Have Ss answer the Qs about
themselves.


Ss: Work in pair.


Activity7
Activity7::



T: Get Ss to fill in the gaps and
T: Get Ss to fill in the gaps and


answer the questionsanswer the questions
Ss: Work in pairs .
Ss: Work in pairs .


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
practice


practice


in front of the classin front of the class
Ss: Open pairwork
Ss: Open pairwork


<i>III_ </i>


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to put the words in the
correct order to make meaninful
sentences.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>



Remark the lesson and give
Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


4. Question words


a) Where is your house? ....


b) How many floors does it have ? ….
c) What is your name ? ….


d) How do you spell it ? ….


e) Which school do you go to ? ….
f) Which grade are you in ? ….
5.


5. ClassesClasses


a. b. c. We have it on …..
a. b. c. We have it on …..


d. On Friday, we have English, Math…
e. On Monday, we have …


6/Present simple tense
a. I get up at …


b. I go to school at…
c. Classes start at…
d. They end at…
e. I have lunch at…
f.g. Yes, I do/ No, I don’t.


h. I go to bed at…
7/Present simple tense


a. gets b. takes c. brushes d. has e. goes


1_ math / and / Tuesday / We / on / have / Friday.
2_ does / breakfast / time / Minh / have / What ?
3_ my / school / I / homework / after / do .
4_ volleyball / afternoon / They / play / every .
*


* Homework:Homework:


Review vocabulary and structures .
Review vocabulary and structures .
Prepare unit 6 A1,2


Prepare unit 6 A1,2


VI.Comments:


---...
...



Week: 11


Week: 11 <sub>Date of preparation: 06/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 06/11/ 2016</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>Unit 6</b>



<b>Unit 6</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2</b>
<b> Lesson 2: A3,4,5,6,7</b>
<b> Lesson 3: B1,2,3,5</b>
<b> Lesson 4: C1,2</b>
<b> Lesson 5: C3,4,6 </b>


<b>Lesson 1: Our house (A1,2) </b>



<b>Lesson 1: Our house (A1,2) </b>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to understand the text about Thuy. understand the text about Thuy.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Review Qs about: name, age, career.Review Qs about: name, age, career.


What is there + prep…? (What is there near the house?)
What is there + prep…? (What is there near the house?)


b Vo: lake, river, park, hotel, trees, flowers, rice paddies, near, in. lake, river, park, hotel, trees, flowers, rice paddies, near, in.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :: </b> pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to give the correct form of
the


verb in bracket .
Ss: Do as directed


T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank with the
correct question word .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Show a picture of Thuy’s house and
its surroundings . Ask Ss to look at
the


picture and guess the aim of the


lesson .


T: Teach vocabulary.


Checking vocabulary :


(What and Where)


1- Thu ( go ) to school every morning .
2- I ( get ) up at five every day .


1- ……….. do you have math?
_ On Monday and Thursday.


2- ……….. does Lan go to bed ?
_ At nine o’clock.


<b>A1: </b>


<b>A1: </b><i><b>Listen and read. Then ask and </b><b>Listen and read. Then ask and </b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> </b><b>answerthe questions </b><b>answerthe questions </b></i>


1.lake (n): 2.river (n):


3. rice-paddy 4. near (prep):gần
(translation)



5. here (adv):ở đây( translation )
6. beautiful (adj):đẹp ( translation )
7. tree (n) : 8. flower (n):


9. park (n):


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

T: Ask Ss to read the text and
answer the questions .
Ss: Work in pair


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to practice
in front of the class


Ss: Close pair
Activity2:


T: Review the structures and give
examples


Ss: Listen and copy down


T: Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and
answering about Thuy’s house and
its


surroundings
Ss: Work in pairs


<i>III_ </i>



<i>III_ CONSOLIDATIONCONSOLIDATION</i>


T:Ask Ss to fill in the blanks in the
passage with the missing words .


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T:Remark the lesson and give
T:Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.



Answers.


1- She is twelve yearsold
2- She is a student


3- His name is Minh
4- He is twenty
4- He is twenty


5- She lives in a house near a lake
5- She lives in a house near a lake


6- There is a lake, a river, a hotel, a park, and a rice
6- There is a lake, a river, a hotel, a park, and a rice




paddy near her housepaddy near her house
<b>A2: </b>


<b>A2: </b><i><b>Practice with a partner</b><b>Practice with a partner</b>. <b> </b><b> </b>. </i>
<i> </i>


<i> StructuresStructures..</i>




What is this ? / What is that ?What is this ? / What is that ?


It is + a /an + N(singular)It is + a /an + N(singular)


What are these ? / What are those ?What are these ? / What are those ?


They are + N(plural)They are + N(plural)


Eg: What is that ? It is a rire paddy.
Eg: What is that ? It is a rire paddy.


What is that ? It is a river .What is that ? It is a river .



What are those ? They are trees.What are those ? They are trees.


What are those ? They are flowers.What are those ? They are flowers.
* Complete the passage.


* Complete the passage.


Thuy is ……… . She is a ……… . She
lives in a house near a ………… . There is a


……… near the lake. There is


a ……… near the hotel . There are …………
and ………… in the park .


Key:
Key:


twelve – student – lake – hotel – park – trees –
twelve – student – lake – hotel – park – trees –
flowers


flowers
*Homework:
*Homework:


Learn the new words by heart .Learn the new words by heart .
Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook. Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.



Week: 11


Week: 11 <sub>Date of preparation: 06/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 06/11/ 2016</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>Unit 6</b>



<b>Unit 6</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b>Lesson 2: Our house (A3,4,5,6,7) </b>



<b>Lesson 2: Our house (A3,4,5,6,7) </b>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson,students will be able to describe simply the surroundings of their describe simply the surroundings of their
houses, read the plural nouns and practice Vo of part A1.


houses, read the plural nouns and practice Vo of part A1.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Review: There is/ are . . . near, in the … Review: There is/ are . . . near, in the …
the way to read pl.nouns flow: /s,iz,z/
the way to read pl.nouns flow: /s,iz,z/
b Vo: review Vo in part A1. review Vo in part A1.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>



<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to complete the network
Ss: Team work


T: Give the pictures and wordcards, ask
Ss


to match each word with each picture
Ss: Match the wordcards with the pictures
T: Correct, read and help Ss to review the
vocabulary


Ss: Listen and repeat in chorus


T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :
T: Tell what is going on in the lesson :


describing surroundings.describing surroundings.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures and


complete the sentences


Ss: Individually
Activity 2:


T: Present and read all the words
T: Present and read all the words


<i> </i>


<i> </i>
.









<b>A3: </b>


<b>A3: </b><i><b>Write. Complete the sentences.</b><b>Write. Complete the sentences.</b></i>


Our house has a Our house has a yardyard . It is near a . It is near a rice paddyrice paddy . .
There


There



is a is a hotelhotel near the near the lakelake . There is a . There is a riverriver and a and a


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

T: Explain the exercise
T: Explain the exercise
Ss: Listen


Ss: Listen


T: Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to
T: Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to
listen and


listen and


write the words they hearwrite the words they hear
Ss: Listen and write


Ss: Listen and write
T: Correct


T: Correct
Activity 3:


T: Have Ss to review the structures
Ss: Listen and copy down


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures , work in
groups to describe the pictures.



Ss: Groupwork


T: Call on some Ss to write on the board
Ss: Write


T: Correct
Activity 4:


T: Let Ss listen to the EZ Talk and repeat
in


Chorus


Ss: Repeat in chorus


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to put the words into the correct
T: Ask Ss to put the words into the correct


order.order.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give homework.


park


park..


There are There are treestrees and and flowesflowes in the park . in the park .
<b>A4: </b>


<b>A4: </b><i><b>Listen . </b><b>Listen . </b></i><b>Write the words you hear…Write the words you hear…</b>


<i>a</i>


<i>a</i> <i>househouse</i> <i>hotelhotel</i> <i>schoolschool</i> <i>villagevillage</i>
<i>b</i>


<i>b</i> <i>towntown</i> <i>countrycountry</i> <i>citycity</i> <i>yardyard</i>
<i>c</i>


<i>c</i> <i>rice paddyrice paddy</i> <i>riverriver</i> <i>lakelake</i>
<i>KEY: </i>


<i>KEY: </i>


<i> </i>


<i> a) hotela) hotel</i>


<i> </i>


<i> b) cityb) city</i>


<i> </i>



<i> c) riverc) river</i>
<b>A5: </b>


<b>A5: </b><i><b>Which of these are near your house?</b><b>Which of these are near your house?</b></i>


<i> </i>


<i> Write sentences about your placeWrite sentences about your place</i>
<i> </i>


<i> There is + a /an + N (singular)There is + a /an + N (singular)</i>
<i> </i>


<i> There are + … + N (plural) There are + … + N (plural) </i>
<i>a)</i>


<i>a)</i> There is a hotel near my house .There is a hotel near my house .


<i>b)</i>


<i>b)</i> There are many trees near my house.There are many trees near my house.


<i>c)</i>


<i>c)</i> There is a river near my house .There is a river near my house .


<i>d)</i>


<i>d)</i> There is a lake near my house .There is a lake near my house .



<i>e)</i>


<i>e)</i> There is a school near my house .There is a school near my house .


<i>f)</i>


<i>f)</i> There is a rice paddy near my house .There is a rice paddy near my house .
<b>A6: </b>


<b>A6: </b><i><b>Play with words</b><b>Play with words</b></i>


Houses and parksHouses and parks


Flowers and treesFlowers and trees


Lakes and riversLakes and rivers


We love these We love these
<b>A7. Remember . </b>


We live in a house.
I have a brother.
Our house has a yard.



1. hotel / house / there / near / is / my / a


2. trees / in / are / park / flowers / there / and / the
*Homework:


*Homework:


Write 3 sentences to describe their house’s
surroundings .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

******************************
******************************


Week: 12


Week: 12 <sub>Date of preparation: 12/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 12/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 34 Date of teaching : 14/11/ 2016
Period: 34 Date of teaching : 14/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 6</b>



<b>Unit 6</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>



<b>Lesson 3</b>


<b>Lesson 3: In the city (B1,2,3,5) : In the city (B1,2,3,5) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>



By the end of the lesson,students will be able to understand the passage about Minh’s family, understand the passage about Minh’s family,
their house and their neighborhood.


their house and their neighborhood.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Review: There is a. . . in/ on/ next to . .. Review: There is a. . . in/ on/ next to . ..
“live, work”


“live, work”


b Vo: store , bookstore , restaurant , temple , hospital , factory , store , bookstore , restaurant , temple , hospital , factory ,


museum , stadium , work , next to , in the neighborhood museum , stadium , work , next to , in the neighborhood
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :: </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Chat with sts by making some Qs
Sts: Answer.


T: Lead to new lesson.


T: Lead to new lesson.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_Presentation:Presentation:</i>


Activity1:


T: Have Ss listen to the text and
answer the question “How many
people are there in Minh’s family?”
Ss: Listen – Answer.


T: Teach vocabulary:
(picture+translation )
Checking vocabulary:


( Slap the board )


T: Ask Ss to read the text and check


-What’s your name?


-How many people are there in your family?
-Where do you live?


-Is your house near a hotel?
-Is your house near trees?
<b>B1: </b>



<b>B1: </b><i><b>Listen and read. Then answer the …</b><b>Listen and read. Then answer the …</b></i>
1/ New words:


1/ New words:


_ store (n): cửa hàng
_ bookstore(n): hiệu sách
_ restaurant (n): nhà hàng
_ temple (n): ngôi đền
_ hospital (n): bệnh viện
_ museum (n) : viện bảo tàng
_ stadium(n): sân vận động
_ factory (n):nhà máy
_ next to ( prep ): bên cạnh


_ in the neighborhood : ở xung quanh/ ở khu vực lân
cận


_ work(v):làm việc


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

their listening.
Ss: Read and check
T: Review


Sts: Listen


T: Ask Ss to do the exercise.


Ss: Work in pair to read and answer.



Activity2:


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and
complete the sentences .(B2)
Ss: Work in groups


Activity3:


T: Explain the exercise
T: Explain the exercise
Ss: Listen


Ss: Listen


T: Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to
T: Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to
listen


listen


and write the words they hearand write the words they hear
Ss: Listen and write


Ss: Listen and write
T: Correct


T: Correct
Activity4:



T: Turn on the EZ Talk
Sts: Listen – Repeat.
T:Remind


Srs:Pay attention


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


Ex: Where does Minh live? He lives in the city.
Where does his mother work? She works in a
hospital.


<b>Where do/does + S work/ live?</b>
<b>S + work(s)/ live(s) . . .</b>
Ex: What is there on the street?


What is there near Minh’s house ?


There is a temple, a bookstore, a restaurant on the
street.


There is a stadium near Minh’s house.
3/Answer true or false.


1-Minh lives in the country
2-There are four people in his family .
3-His house is next to a bookstore.


4-There is a museum near his house .
5-Minh’s mother works in a factory.


6-Minh’s father works in a hospital.


Answer Key: 1 F , 2 T , 3 F , 4 T , 5 F , 6 F
<b>B2: </b>


<b>B2: </b><i><b>Read exercise B1again.</b><b>Read exercise B1again.</b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> </b><b>Then complete the sentences</b><b>Then complete the sentences</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b></i>
a) Minh and his family live in the


a) Minh and his family live in the citycity..
b) On the street, there is a


b) On the street, there is a restaurant, a restaurant, a bookstorebookstore


and a and a temple.temple.


c) His mother works in a


c) His mother works in a hosoital.hosoital.
d) Minh’s


d) Minh’s househouse is next to a is next to a store.store.
e) His father works in a


e) His father works in a factoryfactory..
<b>B3: </b>



<b>B3: </b><i><b>Listen</b><b>Listen</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b></i>


Write the words you hear in your exercise book.Write the words you hear in your exercise book.
a


a museummuseum stadiumstadium templetemple hospitalhospital
b


b restaurantrestaurant storestore bookstorebookstore factoryfactory
c


c parkpark riverriver lakelake yardyard
d


d hotelhotel househouse streetstreet treetree
Key: a. temple b. factory c. yard d.
Key: a. temple b. factory c. yard d.
street


street


<b>B5:</b>


<b>B5:RememberRemember</b>


*


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

T: Let sts repeat Vo and notes.



<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


Learn the new words by heart .
Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.
Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.


Week: 12


Week: 12 <sub>Date of preparation:13/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation:13/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 35 Date of teaching : 15/11/ 2016
Period: 35 Date of teaching : 15/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 6</b>



<b>Unit 6</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 4Lesson 4: Around the house (C1,2) : Around the house (C1,2) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>



By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the passage about a house in the understand the passage about a house in the
mountain; listen, find out and describe the house among houses in the picture.


mountain; listen, find out and describe the house among houses in the picture.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Review: Where + tobe . . ?Review: Where + tobe . . ?


b Vo: behind, in front of, to the left of, to the right of, mountain, well,tall, look at, behind, in front of, to the left of, to the right of, mountain, well,tall, look at,
between.


between.


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Make Qs.
Sts: Answer.


T: Lead to new lesson.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:


Activity1:


T: Show the picture and ask Ss to
describe


Ss: Look at the picture and describe


T: Turn on the EZ Talk.
Sts: Listen.


-What is there near Minh’shouse?
-What is there near Minh’shouse?
-What is there on the street?
-What is there on the street?


-What is there next to Minh’s house?
-What is there next to Minh’s house?
<b>C1: </b>


<b>C1: Listen and read. Then ask and answer …Listen and read. Then ask and answer … </b>





*New words:


_ mountain (n):núi (picture)
_ well (n):giếng (picture )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

T: Teach vocabulary.


Checking vocabulary:


(Slap the board)
T: Explain.


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and
answer the questions.


Ss: Work in pairs


T: Call on some pairs to perform in front
of the class


Ss: Open pairwork
Activity2:


T: Tell the aim of the lesson .
T: Tell the aim of the lesson .


T: Ask Ss to guess which is Ba’s house/
T: Ask Ss to guess which is Ba’s house/


Tuan’s house/ Lan’s house ?Tuan’s house/ Lan’s house ?
Ss: Group work


Ss: Group work


T: Ask Ss to listen and check their
T: Ask Ss to listen and check their




prediction prediction


Ss: Listen and check ( individually)
Ss: Listen and check ( individually)
T: Correct and give the right pictures
T: Correct and give the right pictures


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


_Ask Ss to write about Lan’s house,
Ba’s houae and Tuan’s house.


Sts: Groupwork.


T: Have some result and correct.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


_ to the left of : ở bên trái (picture+example)
_ to the right of : ở bên phải (opposite)



<i> _ between: (prep) ở giữa </i>
*Grammar:


Để hỏi và trả lời người hoặc vật nào đó ở đâu:
Where + tobe + S ?


S + tobe + prep + N(chỉ nơi
chốn)


Answers:


<i>a.</i> It is in front of the house.
<i>b.</i> They are behind the house.
<i>c.</i> They are behind the tall trees.
<i>d.</i> It is to the left of the house.
<i>e.</i> They are to the right of the house.
<i>f.</i> It is between the well and the flowers.
<b>C2: Listen and find the right picture …</b>
<i> A a) Which is Ba’s house ? B</i>







A b) Which is Lan’s house ? BA b) Which is Lan’s house ? B








A c) Which is Tuan’s house ? BA c) Which is Tuan’s house ? B






@ Answer Key: 1A , 2B , 3B


<i>Ex:</i>


<i>Ex:</i>


Ba’s house: There are flowers in the yard.
Ba’s house: There are flowers in the yard.


The yard is in front of thehouse.The yard is in front of thehouse.


<i>*Homework</i>


<i>*Homework: : </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Week: 12


Week: 12 <sub>Date of preparation: 13/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 13/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 36 Date of teaching : 15/11/ 2016


Period: 36 Date of teaching : 15/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 6</b>



<b>Unit 6</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b>:PLACES</b>

<b> </b>

<b> </b>



<b> Lesson 5Lesson 5: Around the house (C3,4,6) : Around the house (C3,4,6) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe the position of stores in a city. describe the position of stores in a city.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Review: Where + tobe . . ?Review: Where + tobe . . ?


b Vo: photocopy store, bakery, movie theater, police station, drugstore, toy store, photocopy store, bakery, movie theater, police station, drugstore, toy store,
between, opposite .


between, opposite .


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :: </b> pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.


<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>



T:


T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and Ask Ss to look at the picture and


identify the position of house’s identify the position of house’s


surroundings. surroundings.


T: Tell the aim of the lesson .
T: Tell the aim of the lesson .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_Presentation:Presentation:</i>


Activity1:


<i> </i>


<i> hospital</i>hospital


stadium stadium
restaurant


restaurant







temple temple
museum


museum


<i> </i>


<i> factory</i>factory



<b>C3: </b>


<b>C3: Listen and read.Listen and read. </b>




_ _ photocopy store photocopy store (n): tiệm phô tô(n): tiệm phô tô


_ bakery _ bakery (n): tiệm bánh mì(n): tiệm bánh mì


_ movie theater _ movie theater (n(n) ) : rạp chiếu phim: rạp chiếu phim



_ drugstore _ drugstore (n): hiệu thuốc tây(n): hiệu thuốc tây


_ police station _ police station (n): đồn cảnh sát (n): đồn cảnh sát


__ toystore toystore (n): hiệu đồ chơi (n): hiệu đồ chơi


_ between _ between (prep) : ở giữa(prep) : ở giữa
<b>Building</b>


<b>Building</b>
<b>s</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

T: T


T: Teach vocabulary each vocabulary <i>(( picture ) picture )</i>


Vocabulary checking :
Vocabulary checking :


(slap the board)(slap the board)
Comprehension statements:Comprehension statements:
T:


T: Ask SsAsk Ss to answer these to answer these
statements are



statements are


True or False :True or False :
Ss: Work in pairs
Ss: Work in pairs


T: Ask Ss to correct the false
T: Ask Ss to correct the false
statements .


statements .


T: Ask Ss to read the text again and
T: Ask Ss to read the text again and


answer the questions .answer the questions .
Activity2:


T: Let sts ask and answer about the
T: Let sts ask and answer about the
position of stores.


position of stores.
Sts: Pairwork.
Sts: Pairwork.


T: Instruct Ss to play the guessing
T: Instruct Ss to play the guessing


game.


game.
Activity3:
T: Guide.
T: Guide.


Sts: Work in pairs.
Sts: Work in pairs.
T:remind


T:remind


Sts:pay attention
Sts:pay attention


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to repeat Vo once more.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.





_ opposite ( n): _ opposite ( n): đối diện đối diện <i>( picture + example)( picture + example)</i>




1-1- The photocopy story is opposite the bakery .The photocopy story is opposite the bakery .


2-2- The movie theater is between the bakery and The movie theater is between the bakery and
the drugstore.


the drugstore.


3-3- The drugstore is opposite the restaurant .The drugstore is opposite the restaurant .


4-4- The restaurant is next to the police station .The restaurant is next to the police station .


5-5- The police station is between the toy store The police station is between the toy store
and the bookstore .


and the bookstore .


@ Answer Key : 1F , 2T , 3T , 4T , 5F
@ Answer Key : 1F , 2T , 3T , 4T , 5F
<b>C4: </b>



<b>C4: Practice with a partner:Practice with a partner:</b>


<i>a)</i>


<i>a)</i> Where is the bakery / the drugstore/ movie Where is the bakery / the drugstore/ movie
theater/


theater/


toy store / restaurant ?toy store / restaurant ?


<i> </i>


<i> It is between It is between the photocopystore the photocopystore and the and the movie movie </i>
<i> </i>


<i> </i>


<i> Theatre.Theatre.</i>




It is opposite the It is opposite the restaurantrestaurant


It is next to ……… It is next to ………
b)


b) It is opposite the movie theater . What is it ? It is opposite the movie theater . What is it ?




It is the police stationIt is the police station. .


1) It is opposite the bakery . 1) It is opposite the bakery . (Toystore)(Toystore)


2) It is between the bakery and the drugstore .2) It is between the bakery and the drugstore .


(Movie theater)(Movie theater)


3) It is next to the restaurant . (Police station) 3) It is next to the restaurant . (Police station)


4) It is opposite the bookstore . (Photocopy store)4) It is opposite the bookstore . (Photocopy store)


5) It is next to the movie theater.5) It is next to the movie theater.


(Bakery/ Drug store)(Bakery/ Drug store)


<b>C5: Ask and answer Qs about your house with a</b>
<b>C5: Ask and answer Qs about your house with a</b>
<b>partner:</b>


<b>partner:</b>



a. What is in front of your house?
a. What is in front of your house?
b. What is behind your house?
b. What is behind your house?
c. What is to the left of your house?
c. What is to the left of your house?
d. What is to the right of your house?
d. What is to the right of your house?
C6.Remember:


C6.Remember:


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


Learn the new words by heart .
Prepare for the 2nd test .
Prepare for the 2nd test .






</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>




Week: 13



Week: 13 <sub>Date of preparation: 19/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 19/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 37 Date of teaching : 21/11/ 2016
Period: 37 Date of teaching : 21/11/ 2016


<b>MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 2 LỚP 6 NĂM HỌC 2016 -2017</b>


<b>MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA LẦN 2 LỚP 6 NĂM HỌC 2016 -2017</b>


<b>NỘI DUNG</b>
<b>NỘI DUNG</b>
<b>CHƯƠNG</b>
<b>CHƯƠNG</b>
<b>TRÌNH </b>
<b>TRÌNH </b>


<b>MỨC ĐỘ</b>
<b>MỨC ĐỘ</b>


<b>TỔNG SỐ</b>
<b>TỔNG SỐ</b>
<b>CHỦ ĐỀ</b>


<b>CHỦ ĐỀ</b> <b>NHẬN BIẾTNHẬN BIẾT</b> <b>THÔNG HIỂUTHÔNG HIỂU</b> <b>VẬN DỤNGVẬN DỤNG</b>


Trắc nghiệm


Trắc nghiệm Tự luậnTự luận Trắc Trắc


nghiệm



nghiệm Tự luậnTự luận TNTN Tự luậnTự luận


S. câu


S. câu ĐiểmĐiểm <sub>câu </sub><sub>câu </sub>S.S. <sub>ểm</sub><sub>ểm</sub>ĐiĐi <sub>câu </sub><sub>câu </sub>S.S. ĐiểĐiể<sub>m</sub><sub>m</sub> <sub>câu </sub><sub>câu </sub>S.S. ĐiểmĐiểm <sub>câu </sub><sub>câu </sub>S.S. ĐiểmĐiểm <sub>câu </sub><sub>câu </sub>S.S. ĐiểmĐiểm <sub>câu</sub><sub>câu</sub>SốSố ĐiểmĐiểm


<b>Unit 4</b>


<b>Unit 4</b> - adjectives- adjectives 11 0.250.25 11 <sub>0,25</sub><sub>0,25</sub>


BIG OR


BIG OR


SMALL?


SMALL? - possessive- possessive<sub>-Vocabulary</sub><sub>-Vocabulary</sub> <sub>2</sub><sub>2</sub> <sub>0.5</sub><sub>0.5</sub> 11 0,250,25 <sub>2</sub>11<sub>2</sub> 0,250,25


0,5


0,5


-to have


-to have 11 0,250,25 11


0,25


0,25



-time


-time 11 0,250,25 11 0,250,25


<b>UNIT 5</b>


<b>UNIT 5</b> Prep: atPrep: at 11 0,250,25 11 <sub>0,25</sub><sub>0,25</sub>


THINGS


THINGS


I DO


I DO Present simplePresent simpletensetense 88 3,53,5 88 3,53,5


<b>UNIT 6</b>


<b>UNIT 6</b> PrepPrep ofof


position


position 22 0,50,5 11 0,250,25 33 0,750,75


PLACES


PLACES Which?,Which?,


where? What?



where? What?


Tobe?


Tobe?


3


3 0,750,75 33


0,75


0,75


Present simple


Present simple


tense


tense 66 33 11 0,250,25 77 3.253.25


Tỉ lệ


Tỉ lệ


Số


Số



câu


câu 2828


Số câu :


Số câu : 1010


25


25


%


%


Số câu :


Số câu : 66
30%


30%


Số câu :


Số câu :


12



12 45%45%


Số


Số


điể


điể


m


m


10


10


Số điểm :


Số điểm : 2,52,5 Số điểm :Số điểm : 33 Số điểm :Số điểm : 4,54,5


FULL NAME: ……….


FULL NAME: ……….

<b>THE SECOND TEST OF SEMESTER I</b>

<b>THE SECOND TEST OF SEMESTER I</b>



CLASS 6....


CLASS 6.... Time: 45 minutesTime: 45 minutes
I/ Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5đ)


I/ Chọn đáp án đúng nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau: (2,5đ)


1.


1. ……… ……… is your classroom? On 2is your classroom? On 2ndnd<sub> floor. (What/ Where/ Which)</sub><sub> floor. (What/ Where/ Which)</sub>


2.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

3.


3. There is a hospital ……….. Minh’s house. (next/ in front/ near)There is a hospital ……….. Minh’s house. (next/ in front/ near)
4.


4. What time do classes finish? …….. eleven. (on/ in/ at)What time do classes finish? …….. eleven. (on/ in/ at)
5.


5. She has five ……….. on Friday. (grade/ classes/ class)She has five ……….. on Friday. (grade/ classes/ class)
6.


6. ………. grade is Lan in? (Which/ What/ Where)………. grade is Lan in? (Which/ What/ Where)
7.


7. My school is ……….. school. (a big/ big/ small)My school is ……….. school. (a big/ big/ small)
8.


8. Doctors work in the ………. (museum/ hospital/ factory)Doctors work in the ………. (museum/ hospital/ factory)
9.


9. Is your house near a school? ……… (Yes, it is/ Yes, there is/ Yes, it does)Is your house near a school? ……… (Yes, it is/ Yes, there is/ Yes, it does)
10.



10.………….? It’s six o’clock.(What time is it?/What is it time?/What time it is?)………….? It’s six o’clock.(What time is it?/What is it time?/What time it is?)
II/ Làm theo hướng dẫn trong ngoặc: (1,5đ)


II/ Làm theo hướng dẫn trong ngoặc: (1,5đ)
1.


1. These are the books of the students. (viết lại câu dùng dạng sở hữu cách ’s)These are the books of the students. (viết lại câu dùng dạng sở hữu cách ’s)


……….
……….
2.


2. Our house (have) ………….. a yard. (chia động từ trong ngoặc)Our house (have) ………….. a yard. (chia động từ trong ngoặc)
3.


3. His father (work) …………... in a school. (chia động từ trong ngoặc)His father (work) …………... in a school. (chia động từ trong ngoặc)
4.


4. Their house is next …………..a temple. (điền giới từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống)Their house is next …………..a temple. (điền giới từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống)
5.


5. What do you do after school? (trả lời câu hỏi) What do you do after school? (trả lời câu hỏi) ………
6.


6. She watches television every night. (đổi câu sang thể phủ định)She watches television every night. (đổi câu sang thể phủ định)


……….
……….
III/ Đọc đoạn văn, sau đó trả lời câu hỏi: (3đ)



III/ Đọc đoạn văn, sau đó trả lời câu hỏi: (3đ)


Minh is fourteen years old. He is in grade 9. He lives in a house with his father, mother
Minh is fourteen years old. He is in grade 9. He lives in a house with his father, mother
and sister. Their house is next to a store. On the street, there is a bookstore, a restaurant and a
and sister. Their house is next to a store. On the street, there is a bookstore, a restaurant and a
temple.


temple.


In the neighborhood, there is a photocopy store, a movie theater and a police station. His
In the neighborhood, there is a photocopy store, a movie theater and a police station. His
father works in the police station. His mother works in the bookstore.


father works in the police station. His mother works in the bookstore.
Questions:


Questions:
1.


1. How old is Minh?How old is Minh? ………
2.


2. What does he do?What does he do? ………
3.


3. Which grade is he in?Which grade is he in? ………
4.



4. How many people are there in his family?How many people are there in his family? ………
5.


5. Is his house next to a store?Is his house next to a store? ………
6.


6. Where does his father work?Where does his father work? ………
IV/ Dựa vào các từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh: (3đ)


IV/ Dựa vào các từ gợi ý để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh: (3đ)
1.


1. Tom/ get up/ half past six/ every morning.Tom/ get up/ half past six/ every morning.
2.


2. He/ brush/ teeth/ 6.45He/ brush/ teeth/ 6.45
3.


3. He/ have/ breakfast/ seven.He/ have/ breakfast/ seven.
4.


4. He/ go/ school/ seven thirty.He/ go/ school/ seven thirty.
5.


5. His classes/ start/ 8 o’clock/ finish/ 4.30 p.mHis classes/ start/ 8 o’clock/ finish/ 4.30 p.m
6. He/ do/ homework/ evening.


6. He/ do/ homework/ evening.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

Week: 13



Week: 13 <sub>Date of preparation: 20/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 20/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 38 Date of teaching : 22/11/ 2016
Period: 38 Date of teaching : 22/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 7</b>


<b>Unit 7 :YOUR HOUSE:YOUR HOUSE</b>
<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,3,5,7</b>
<b> Lesson 2: B1</b>


<b> Lesson 3: B2,3,4</b>
<b> Lesson 4: C1,3</b>
<b> Lesson 5: C4,6 </b>


<b>Lesson 1</b>



<b>Lesson 1</b>

<b>: Is your house big? (A1,3,5,7) </b>

<b>: Is your house big? (A1,3,5,7) </b>

<i><b> </b></i>

<i><b> </b></i>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice to describe a house and its practice to describe a house and its
surrounding with adjectives.


surrounding with adjectives.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



a. Grammar : Is it …? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.Is it …? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.


Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
b Vo: old, new, beautiful, vegetable garden.old, new, beautiful, vegetable garden.


Review: big, small, yard, flower, tree, lake, river, rice paddy.
Review: big, small, yard, flower, tree, lake, river, rice paddy.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


(


(WORDSQUAREWORDSQUARE))


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_Presentation::Presentation:</i>:
Activity1:





T: Teach vocabulary.
T: Teach vocabulary.
T: Turn on the EZ Talk.
Sts: Listen.


T: Let sts practice the dialogue.


<b>A1: </b>


<b>A1: Listen. Then practice with a partnerListen. Then practice with a partner .</b>.<b> </b>
<i> </i> _ old_ old ( adj) : cũ ( adj) : cũ


_ _ newnew : mới( : mới( <i>example + realia + opposite )example + realia + opposite</i> )


e.g.: My book is old . Lan’s book is new.e.g.: My book is old . Lan’s book is new.


_ _ any any : một vài, một ít.(dùng trong câu PĐ và NV) : một vài, một ít.(dùng trong câu PĐ và NV)


<i>( translation</i>


<i>( translation )</i> )


_ some_ some:một vài, một ít (dùng trong câu khẳng định):một vài, một ít (dùng trong câu khẳng định)


<i>(translation)</i>


<i>(translation)</i>



_ beautiful (adj): đẹp_ beautiful (adj): đẹp
Y


Y EE BB II GG TT RR EE
R


R LL AA KK EE RR EE SS
T


T II MM UU EE NN WW MM
N


N VV II SS TT RR OO AA
U


U EE EE NN GG II LL LL
O


O HH OO UU SS EE FF LL
C


C RR II GG HH TT AA UU
F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Sts: Work in pairs.


T: Then have some pairs practice
aloud.



T: Let sts ask and answer with their
partner.


Sts: Pairwork.


T: Have some pairs practice aloud.
T: Emphasize


T: Emphasize
Activity 2:


T: Teach vocabulary.
T: Teach vocabulary.
T: Guide.


Ss: Work in pair
Ss: Work in pair


T:Review the structures :
T:Review the structures :
T: Have Ss


T: Have Ss practise the structurepractise the structure


<i>What is that ? What is that ?</i> <i>_ It is a hotel._ It is a hotel.</i>
<i>Ss: Work in pair </i>


<i>Ss: Work in pair </i>



T: Have Ss practise the structure
T: Have Ss practise the structure


<i>Is there / Are there .. ?Is there / Are there</i> .. ?
Ss: Work in pairs.


Ss: Work in pairs.


Activity 3:Activity 3:


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures in
T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures in
A4 and choose one of them.


A4 and choose one of them.
T: Guide.


T: Guide.


Sts: work in pairs
Sts: work in pairs


T: Have some pairs guess the
T: Have some pairs guess the
pictures which their friends chose
pictures which their friends chose
by making some Qs.



by making some Qs.


T:remind


Sts:pay attention


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>
T: Make Qs


Sts: Answer.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


_ vegetable garden: vườn rau._ vegetable garden: vườn rau.




 Ask Qs about his/ her house:Ask Qs about his/ her house:
Ex: Is your house big?


Ex: Is your house big?


Yes, it is.Yes, it is.
@ Is it . . .?
@ Is it . . .?



Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.
<b>A3: </b>


<b>A3: Practice with a partnerPractice with a partner</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b>
Supermarket:
Supermarket:
Post office:
Post office:
Bank:
Bank:
1)


1) _What is that ? _What is that ?


_ It is a hotel._ It is a hotel.


2)_ Is there 2)_ Is there a lakea lake near near your houseyour house ? ?


_Yes , there is . /No , there isn’t. _Yes , there is . /No , there isn’t.


_ Are there _ Are there any treesany trees near near youryour house ? house ?


_ Yes , there are . / No , there aren‘t._ Yes , there are . / No , there aren‘t.
1) What is this ? It is a bank



1) What is this ? It is a bank


Is there a bank near your house ? No, there isn’tIs there a bank near your house ? No, there isn’t
2) What are those ? They are flowers.


2) What are those ? They are flowers.


Are there any flowers near your house ?Are there any flowers near your house ?


Yes, there are.Yes, there are.


3) What is this ? It is a supermarket
3) What is this ? It is a supermarket


Is there a supermarketnear your school ?Is there a supermarketnear your school ?


Yes,there is .Yes,there is .
4) …….


4) …….
<b>A5: </b>


<b>A5: Listen to this description</b><sub> </sub><b>Listen to this description</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b>





Key: Picture aKey: Picture a


<i>(Tape scrip:</i>


<i>(Tape scrip: There are some mountains behind the There are some mountains behind the </i>
<i>house. There are tall trees to the right of the house. </i>


<i>house. There are tall trees to the right of the house. </i>


<i>There is a lake to the left.)</i>


<i>There is a lake to the left.)</i>
Homework:


Learn the new words by heart .
Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.


Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.
Do exercises: 1,2 in workbook.
A7.Remember


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


Week: 13


Week: 13 <sub>Date of preparation: 20/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 20/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 39 Date of teaching : 22/11/ 2016
Period: 39 Date of teaching : 22/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 7</b>



<b>Unit 7</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>



<b> Lesson 3Lesson 3: Town or country? (B1) : Town or country? (B1) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the passages about Ba’s understand the passages about Ba’s
apartment in a town and Chi’s house in the country; sts can look at pics and describe an
apartment in a town and Chi’s house in the country; sts can look at pics and describe an
apartment in town or a house in the country.


apartment in town or a house in the country.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : review: Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
Do you live …?/ Does she live …?


Do you live …?/ Does she live …?


b Vo: clinic, zoo, apartment, paddy field, noisy, quiet, here.clinic, zoo, apartment, paddy field, noisy, quiet, here.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss some questions
T: Ask Ss some questions
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


T: Have class play the game
T: Have class play the game


(


(BRAINSTORMINGBRAINSTORMING))
Ss: Whole class


Ss: Whole class


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:



T: Teach vocabulary:
T: Teach vocabulary:


Checking vocabulary:
Checking vocabulary:


(W(W<i>hat and Where)hat and Where</i>)
T: Ask Ss to read the text .


T: Ask Ss to read the text .


T: Call on some Ss to read the text
T: Call on some Ss to read the text
aloud


aloud


Ss: Read individually
Ss: Read individually




+ Is there a river in front of your house ?+ Is there a river in front of your house ?


+ Are there any mountains behind your house ?+ Are there any mountains behind your house ?


<b>B1: </b>



<b>B1: Listen and read . Then choose theListen and read . Then choose the ……</b> ……
_ _ apartment apartment (n) : căn hộ ( (n) : căn hộ ( <i>picture )picture</i> )


__ clinic clinic (n): phòng khám ( (n): phòng khám ( <i>translation )translation</i> )
_ _ market market (n) : chợ ( (n) : chợ ( <i>picture ) picture</i> )


_ _ zoozoo(n) : sở thú ( (n) : sở thú ( <i>picturepicture</i> ) )


_ _ noisynoisy (n) : nhộn nhịp, ồn ào ( (n) : nhộn nhịp, ồn ào ( <i>exampleexample +</i> +<i>picture )picture</i> )
__ quiet quiet(n) : yên tĩnh ( (n) : yên tĩnh ( <i>oppositeopposite )</i> )


_ <sub> </sub>_ paddy-fieldpaddy-field(n) (n)  rice paddy rice paddy ( synonym )( synonym )




<b>C</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

T: Ask Ss to choose the correct
T: Ask Ss to choose the correct
answers


answers


Ss: Work in pair
Ss: Work in pair


T: Call on some pairs to practice
T: Call on some pairs to practice
before



before


the classthe class


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to talk about themselves .
T: Ask Ss to talk about themselves .


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


<i> </i>


<i> </i>


a) Does Ba live in town ? Yes, he does.
a) Does Ba live in town ? Yes, he does.
b) Does he live in a house ? No, he doesn’t.
b) Does he live in a house ? No, he doesn’t.
c) Is it noisy ? Yes, it is.



c) Is it noisy ? Yes, it is.


d) Does Chi live in town ? No, she doesn’t.
d) Does Chi live in town ? No, she doesn’t.
e) Are there any stores ? No, there aren’t.
e) Are there any stores ? No, there aren’t.
f) Is it quiet ? Yes, it is.


f) Is it quiet ? Yes, it is.
quiet.


quiet.


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


Learn the new words by heart .
Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Prepare part C1,3 for next lesson.
Prepare part C1,3 for next lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

Week: 14


Week: 14 <sub>Date of preparation: 26/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 26/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 40 Date of teaching : 28/11/ 2016
Period: 40 Date of teaching : 28/11/ 2016



<b>Unit 7</b>



<b>Unit 7</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>



<b> Lesson 3Lesson 3: Town or country? (B2,3,4) : Town or country? (B2,3,4) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the passages about Ba’s understand the passages about Ba’s
apartment in a town and Chi’s house in the country; sts can look at pics and describe an
apartment in a town and Chi’s house in the country; sts can look at pics and describe an
apartment in town or a house in the country.


apartment in town or a house in the country.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : review: Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.Is there a/an . . .? Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
Are there any . . .? Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t.
Do you live …?/ Does she live …?


Do you live …?/ Does she live …?
b Vo: clinic, zoo, apartment, paddy field, noisy, quiet, here.clinic, zoo, apartment, paddy field, noisy, quiet, here.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>



<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss some questions
T: Ask Ss some questions
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


T: Have class play the game
T: Have class play the game


(


(BRAINSTORMINGBRAINSTORMING))
Ss: Whole class


Ss: Whole class


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Ask Ss to read about Ba
T: Ask Ss to read about Ba
Ss: Read individually.
Ss: Read individually.



T: Call on some Ss to read aloud
T: Call on some Ss to read aloud
Ss: Read individually


Ss: Read individually


T: Ask Ss to write about Chi .
T: Ask Ss to write about Chi .
Ss: Write individually.


Ss: Write individually.
Activity 2:


T: Explain the exercise.
T: Explain the exercise.
Ss: Listen


Ss: Listen




+ Is there a river in front of your house ?+ Is there a river in front of your house ?


+ Are there any mountains behind your house ?+ Are there any mountains behind your house ?


<b>B2: </b>


<b>B2: Read about Ba. Read about Ba. </b>



Then write sentences about Chi.Then write sentences about Chi.




 Ba lives in an apartment in town.Ba lives in an apartment in town.


Near his apartment,There is a market. Near his apartment,There is a market.


It is very noisy.It is very noisy.




 Chi lives in a house in the country. Chi lives in a house in the country.


Near her house there aren’t any stores .Near her house there aren’t any stores .


It is very quiet. It is very quiet.
<b>B3: </b>


<b>B3: Listen and check. Complete the table……Listen and check. Complete the table……</b>
Name


Name CityCity TownTown CountryCountry ApartmentApartment HouseHouse


Minh



Minh vv xx xx vv xx


Tuan


Tuan xx vv xx xx vv


<b>C</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

T: Ask Ss to guess Where Nam/
T: Ask Ss to guess Where Nam/
Tuan/


Tuan/


Nga lives .Nga lives .


Ss: Work in groups
Ss: Work in groups


T: Turn on the tape and ask Ss to
T: Turn on the tape and ask Ss to
listen


listen


and check their predictionand check their prediction
Ss: Listen and check



Ss: Listen and check


T: Give the correct answers
T: Give the correct answers


T: Ask Ss some questions about Minh,
T: Ask Ss some questions about Minh,


Tuan, Nga.Tuan, Nga.
Ss: Answer .
T:Remind
T:Remind


Sts:listen carefully
Sts:listen carefully
<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION</i>


T: Ask Ss to talk about themselves .
T: Ask Ss to talk about themselves .


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.



homework.


Nga


Nga vv xx xx xx vv


<i>Key:</i>


<i>Key:</i>


<i> Minh lives in an apartment in the city.</i>Minh lives in an apartment in the city.
Tuan lives in a house in a town.Tuan lives in a house in a town.


Nga lives in a house in the city.Nga lives in a house in the city.
1)


1) Does Minh live in a house ?Does Minh live in a house ?
2)


2) Does Nga live in the country ?Does Nga live in the country ?
3)


3) Does Tuan live in the city ?Does Tuan live in the city ?
4)


4) ……..……..


<i>Ex:</i>


<i>Ex: I live in a house in the country. Near my house </i> I live in a house in the country. Near my house


there is a big paddy field. It is very quiet.


there is a big paddy field. It is very quiet.
<b>B4.Remember</b>


<b>B4.Remember</b>


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

Week: 14


Week: 14 <sub>Date of preparation: 27/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 27/11/ 2016</sub>


Period: 41 Date of teaching : 29/11/ 2016
Period: 41 Date of teaching : 29/11/ 2016


<b>Unit 7</b>



<b>Unit 7</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>



<b> Lesson 4Lesson 4: On the move (C1,3) : On the move (C1,3) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about means of transport. ask and answer about means of transport.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>



a. Grammar : How do you go/ travel to school? - I go to school by bike. /I travel by
bike. /I walk .


How does she go/ travel to work? - She goes by bus./ She travels by bus./
She walks.


The simple present with: I travel/She travels…


b Vo: by bus/ bike/ motorbike/ car/ plane/ train, to travel, to walk.by bus/ bike/ motorbike/ car/ plane/ train, to travel, to walk.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<i><b>V/ Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to talk about Ba.
T: Ask Ss to talk about Ba.
T:


T: Set the situation.Set the situation.


__Ask Ss to guess the aim of the Ask Ss to guess the aim of the


lesson . lesson .


__Tell the aim of the lesson Tell the aim of the lesson


<i>II. PRESENTATION</i>


<i>II. PRESENTATION</i>::
Activity1:


T: Teach vocabulary: (


T: Teach vocabulary: (<i>picturepicture</i>))


Checking vocabulary:
Checking vocabulary:


(Matching)(Matching)


T: Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue
T: Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue
T: Let sts work in pairs to practice
T: Let sts work in pairs to practice


before the class.before the class.


<b>C1: </b>


<b>C1: ListenListen</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b><i>How do you go to school ?How do you go to school ?</i>





1. bike / bicycle 2. motorbike 1. bike / bicycle 2. motorbike






I go to school by bike. I go to school by motorbike.
I go to school by bike. I go to school by motorbike.


3. bus 3. bus 4. car 4. car





I go to school by bus. I go to school by car.
I go to school by bus. I go to school by car.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

T: Explain the grammar notes
T: Explain the grammar notes
Ss: Copy down


Ss: Copy down


T: Have Ss ask and answer the
T: Have Ss ask and answer the



questions .questions .
Ss: Work in pairs
Ss: Work in pairs


T: Call on some pairs to practice in
T: Call on some pairs to practice in


front of the classfront of the class
Activity2:


T: Explain the exercise
T: Explain the exercise
T: Turn on the EZ Talk.
T: Turn on the EZ Talk.


Ss: Listen and write short answers.
Ss: Listen and write short answers.
T: Ask sts to give their answers.
T: Ask sts to give their answers.
T: Turn on the tape again, ask Ss to
T: Turn on the tape again, ask Ss to


listen and correct the mistakes if listen and correct the mistakes if
any


any


Ss: Correct.


Ss: Correct.


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>
T: Make some Qs.
Sts: Answer.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework


homework


4. walk


4. walk I walk to school. I walk to school.
-plane: mbay


-plane: mbay
-train: tàu hỏa
-train: tàu hỏa


*Structures. Ask and answer about means of transports.
*Structures. Ask and answer about means of transports.


How + do/does + S + go/travel …….?How + do/does + S + go/travel …….?




S + go(es)/travel(s) ……….. + by +means of S + go(es)/travel(s) ……….. + by +means of
transports


transports


a) How does Lien go to school? She goes by bike.
a) How does Lien go to school? She goes by bike.
b) How does Thu go to school? She goes by
b) How does Thu go to school? She goes by
motorbike.


motorbike.


c) How does Tuan go to school? He goes by bus.
c) How does Tuan go to school? He goes by bus.
d) How does Hoa go to school? She goes by car.
d) How does Hoa go to school? She goes by car.
e) How does Huong go to school? She walks to
e) How does Huong go to school? She walks to
school.


school.
<b>C3: </b>


<b>C3: Listen and write short answersListen and write short answers :</b>:<b> </b>


<i>Ex:</i>



<i>Ex: How do they travel? </i> How do they travel?


By bus.By bus.


a.Ba: By motorbike e.Tuan: By bus
a.Ba: By motorbike e.Tuan: By bus
b.Lan: By plane f.Mrs.Huong: By bike
b.Lan: By plane f.Mrs.Huong: By bike
c.Nam: By bus g.Mr.Ba: By train
c.Nam: By bus g.Mr.Ba: By train
d.Nga: By car h.Miss Chi: Walk
d.Nga: By car h.Miss Chi: Walk


<i>ex:</i>


<i>ex: How do you go to school, Anh?</i> How do you go to school, Anh?


How does Anh go to school, Tuan?How does Anh go to school, Tuan?


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


Learn the new words by heart .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

Week: 14


Week: 14 <sub>Date of preparation: 27/11/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 27/11/ 2016</sub>



Period: 42 Date of teaching : 29/11/2016
Period: 42 Date of teaching : 29/11/2016


<b>Unit 7</b>



<b>Unit 7</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>

<b>:YOUR HOUSE</b>



<b> Lesson 5Lesson 5: On the move (C4,6) : On the move (C4,6) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read and understand the passage about read and understand the passage about
Hoang’s daily activities; talk about Hoang’s and sts’ daily activities .


Hoang’s daily activities; talk about Hoang’s and sts’ daily activities .
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : review: What time does he/ do you get up?


The simple present with: I leave the house/She leaves the house.
b Vo: daily activities: take a shower, leave the house, start, end.take a shower, leave the house, start, end.


time: half past = thirty past; a quarter to/ past = fifteen to/ past.
time: half past = thirty past; a quarter to/ past = fifteen to/ past.
Conjontions: so, then.


Conjontions: so, then.



Phonetics: /ai/ , /i/ in words: time, five, six, clinic.
Phonetics: /ai/ , /i/ in words: time, five, six, clinic.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T:


T: Ask Ss to look at the pictures and Ask Ss to look at the pictures and


write the name of each means of write the name of each means of


transportation.transportation.
Ss: Team work
Ss: Team work


T: Ask Ss to answer some questions
T: Ask Ss to answer some questions
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


<i>II_</i>



<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T:


T: SetSet the situation:the situation:


T: Ask Ss some questions:
T: Ask Ss some questions:
T:


T: Ask Ss to guess the aim of the Ask Ss to guess the aim of the
lesson


lesson








Bike Car BusBike Car Bus









Train Motorbike PlaneTrain Motorbike Plane
+ How do you go to school ?+ How do you go to school ?


+ How does your father travel to work?+ How does your father travel to work?
<b>C4: </b>


<b>C4: Listen and read. Then ask and answer the Listen and read. Then ask and answer the </b>
<b>questions.</b>


<b>questions.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

T:


T: Tell the aim of the lesson :Tell the aim of the lesson :


Talk about Hoang’s habitual Talk about Hoang’s habitual
actions


actions


T: Teach vocabulary: ( T: Teach vocabulary: ( <i>translation)translation</i>)


Checking vocabulary: Checking vocabulary:


((<i>Slap the board)Slap the board</i>)
T: Ask Ss to read the text.
T: Ask Ss to read the text.


T: Have Ss read the text again .
T: Have Ss read the text again .
T: Have Ss ask and answer the
T: Have Ss ask and answer the
questions


questions


Sts: Pairwork.
Sts: Pairwork.
Activity2:


T: Guide – Turn on the EZ Talk.
Sts: Listen and repeat.


T: Ask sts to write two more verses
T: Ask sts to write two more verses
about sts (do it at home)


about sts (do it at home)


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>
T: Review.


T: Review.
Sts: Listen.
Sts: Listen.


<i>IV: </i>



<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>




T: Remark the lesson and give T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


+ What time do you go to school? + What time do you go to school?
+ How do you go to school ? + How do you go to school ?
+ Is your school near your house ?+ Is your school near your house ?
+What time do classes start ? +What time do classes start ?
+What time do they finish ?+What time do they finish ?
_ leave _ leave (v) :rời khỏi (v) :rời khỏi


_ so_ so(adv) : vì thế, vì vậy(adv) : vì thế, vì vậy
_ _ thenthen<i>(adv) : sau đó (adv) : </i>sau đó
__ end end (v) (v)   finishfinish


@


@ Answer the questionsAnswer the questions


1- Hoang gets up at five thirty.
1- Hoang gets up at five thirty.


2- He goes to school at half past six .2- He goes to school at half past six .
3- No, he doesn’t.



3- No, he doesn’t.
4- Yes, he does.
4- Yes, he does.


5- His classes start at seven .
5- His classes start at seven .
6- They end at half past eleven.
6- They end at half past eleven.


<b>C6: </b>


<b>C6: RememberRemember</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b>


Structures. Aak and answer about means of
Structures. Aak and answer about means of
transports.


transports.


How + do/does + S + go/travel …….?How + do/does + S + go/travel …….?


S + go(es)/travel(s) ……….. + by +means of S + go(es)/travel(s) ……….. + by +means of
transports


transports


I/We/You/They get-leave-start-end


I/We/You/They get-leave-start-end
He/She gets-leaves-starts-ends
He/She gets-leaves-starts-ends
Homework


Homework::


Learn the lesson carefully.


Do the exercises 3,4 in workbook .
Do the exercises 3,4 in workbook .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<i>*************************************</i>


<i>*************************************</i>


Week: 15


Week: 15 <sub>Date of preparation:November 22nd, 2014</sub><sub>Date of preparation:November 22nd, 2014</sub>


Period: 43 Date of teaching :November 24th, 2014
Period: 43 Date of teaching :November 24th, 2014


CORRECTING THE TEST
CORRECTING THE TEST
I/ Objectives:


I/ Objectives:


At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present .


At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present .
II/ Language content:


II/ Language content:


the simple present, Wh-words, prepositions, possessive, adjectives.
the simple present, Wh-words, prepositions, possessive, adjectives.
III/ Teaching aids


III/ Teaching aids: chalk, board, test.: chalk, board, test.
IV/ Procedures


IV/ Procedures: :


T’s and Sts’ activities:


T’s and Sts’ activities: Contents:Contents:


Presentation:
Presentation:


T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
Sts: Look at their test papers.


Sts: Look at their test papers.
T: Revise and correct.


T: Revise and correct.
Sts: Listen.



Sts: Listen.


T: Ask sometimes.
T: Ask sometimes.
Sts: Answer.
Sts: Answer.
T: Summarize.
T: Summarize.
Sts: Take notes.
Sts: Take notes.


A/


A/ Grammar:Grammar:
1.


1.<i>The present simple tense (verb):The present simple tense (verb):</i>


+ We/ you/ they + V-bare inf…
+ We/ you/ they + V-bare inf…


He/ she/ it + V-s/es…He/ she/ it + V-s/es…


_ S + don’t/doesn’t + V-bare inf…
_ S + don’t/doesn’t + V-bare inf…
? Do/Does + S + V-bare inf….?
? Do/Does + S + V-bare inf….?



<i>2. to have:</i>


<i>2. to have:</i>


We/ you/ they + have…
We/ you/ they + have…
He/ she/ it + has …He/ she/ it + has …


<i>3. Preposition:</i>


<i>3. Preposition:</i>


At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)
At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)


On: vào (đứng trước thứ, ngày, buổi có
On: vào (đứng trước thứ, ngày, buổi có
thứ)


thứ)


In: vào (đứng trước buổi, tháng, năm,
In: vào (đứng trước buổi, tháng, năm,
mùa…)


mùa…)


<i>4. possessive:</i>


<i>4. possessive:</i>



Ex: Mai’s book is big.
Ex: Mai’s book is big.


The students’ are small.The students’ are small.
5.


5. <i>adjectives:adjectives</i>:
6.


6. Wh-words.Wh-words.
B/


B/ Keys:Keys:


I/ 1. Where 6. which
I/ 1. Where 6. which


2.


2. on 7. a bigon 7. a big
3.


3. near 8. hospitalnear 8. hospital
4.


4. at 9. Yes, it isat 9. Yes, it is
5.



5. classes 10.What time is classes 10.What time is
it?


it?


II/ 1.These are the students’ books.
II/ 1.These are the students’ books.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>



5.Ex: I listen to music/ I watch TV . . .5.Ex: I listen to music/ I watch TV . . .
6.She doesn’t watch television every night.
6.She doesn’t watch television every night.
III/ 1.Minh is fourteen years old.


III/ 1.Minh is fourteen years old.


2.He is a student.2.He is a student.


3.He is in grade 9.3.He is in grade 9.


4.There are four people in his family.4.There are four people in his family.


5.Yes, it is.5.Yes, it is.



6.His father works in the police station.6.His father works in the police station.
IV/


IV/


1.Tom gets up at half past six every
1.Tom gets up at half past six every
morning.


morning.


2.He brushes his teeth at 6.45
2.He brushes his teeth at 6.45
3.He has breakfast at seven.
3.He has breakfast at seven.


4.He goes to school at seven thirty.
4.He goes to school at seven thirty.


5.His classes start at 8 o’clock and finish at
5.His classes start at 8 o’clock and finish at


4.30 p.m.4.30 p.m.


6.He does his homework in the evening
6.He does his homework in the evening
************************************



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

Week: 15


Week: 15 <sub>Date of preparation: 03/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 03/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 43 Date of teaching : 05/12/ 2016
Period: 43 Date of teaching : 05/12/ 2016


<b>CORRECTING THE TEST</b>



<b>CORRECTING THE TEST</b>



I/ Objectives:
I/ Objectives:


At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present .
At the end of the lesson, sts will be able master some knowledge of the simple present .
II/ Language content:


II/ Language content:


the simple present, Wh-words, prepositions, possessive, adjectives.
the simple present, Wh-words, prepositions, possessive, adjectives.
III/ Teaching aids


III/ Teaching aids: chalk, board, test.: chalk, board, test.
IV/ Procedures


IV/ Procedures: :


<b>T’s and Sts’ activities:</b>



<b>T’s and Sts’ activities:</b> <b>Contents:Contents:</b>


Presentation:
Presentation:


T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
T: Hand out sts the test papers scored.
Sts: Look at their test papers.


Sts: Look at their test papers.
T: Revise and correct.


T: Revise and correct.
Sts: Listen.


Sts: Listen.


T: Ask sometimes.
T: Ask sometimes.
Sts: Answer.
Sts: Answer.
T: Summarize.
T: Summarize.
Sts: Take notes.
Sts: Take notes.


A/


A/ Grammar:Grammar:


1.


1.<i>The present simple tense (verb):The present simple tense (verb):</i>


+ We/ you/ they + V-bare inf…
+ We/ you/ they + V-bare inf…


He/ she/ it + V-s/es…He/ she/ it + V-s/es…


_ S + don’t/doesn’t + V-bare inf…
_ S + don’t/doesn’t + V-bare inf…
? Do/Does + S + V-bare inf….?
? Do/Does + S + V-bare inf….?


<i>2. to have:</i>


<i>2. to have:</i>


We/ you/ they + have…
We/ you/ they + have…
He/ she/ it + has …He/ she/ it + has …


<i>3. Preposition:</i>


<i>3. Preposition:</i>


At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)
At: vào lúc (đứng trước giờ)



On: vào (đứng trước thứ, ngày, buổi có thứ)
On: vào (đứng trước thứ, ngày, buổi có thứ)
In: vào (đứng trước buổi, tháng, năm, mùa…)
In: vào (đứng trước buổi, tháng, năm, mùa…)


<i>4. possessive:</i>


<i>4. possessive:</i>


Ex: Mai’s book is big.
Ex: Mai’s book is big.


The students’ are small.The students’ are small.
7.


7. <i>adjectives:adjectives</i>:
8.


8. Wh-words.Wh-words.
<b>B/ </b>


<b>B/ KeysKeys</b>:<b> </b>:


I/ 1. Where 6. which
I/ 1. Where 6. which


2.


2. on 7. a bigon 7. a big


3.


3. near 8. hospitalnear 8. hospital
4.


4. at at
5.


5. classes classes
II/


II/


1. has 2.works 3.to1. has 2.works 3.to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

III/ 1.Minh is fourteen years old.
III/ 1.Minh is fourteen years old.


2.He is a student.2.He is a student.


3.He is in grade 9.3.He is in grade 9.


4.There are four people in his family.4.There are four people in his family.



5.Yes, it is.5.Yes, it is.


6.His father works in the police station.6.His father works in the police station.
IV/


IV/


1. This is not my pen
1. This is not my pen


2. How many floors does your school have ?
2. How many floors does your school have ?
3. What time does he wash his face ?


3. What time does he wash his face ?
4. Is the bag big or small ?


4. Is the bag big or small ?
V/


V/


1.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

Week: 15


Week: 15 <sub>Date of preparation: 04/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 04/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 44 Date of teaching : 06/12/ 2016


Period: 44 Date of teaching : 06/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Division of lessons</b>
<b> Lesson 1 : A1,2,3</b>
<b> Lesson 2: A4,6,7</b>
<b> Lesson 3: B1</b>
<b> Lesson 4: B2,4</b>
<b> Lesson 5: C1,2</b>
<b> Lesson 6: C3,4,5,6 </b>


<b>Lesson 1</b>


<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (A1,2,3) : What are you doing? (A1,2,3) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
I


I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe, ask and answer some activities that describe, ask and answer some activities that
are happening.


are happening.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : -talk about an action which is happening: I am playing…/She is
riding…/We are traveling…/They are waiting…



-ask and answer activities which are happening: What are you doing?/What
is he doing?


*the present progressive tense in informative and questionative. “what …
doing?”


b Vo: means of transports: ride (her bike), drive(his car), wait for a train.


Two ways to form V-ing: play-playing; ride-riding, have-having, drive-driving.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<i><b>V/ Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to read the passage on page
T: Ask Ss to read the passage on page


80 and answer some questions :80 and answer some questions :
Ss: Read and answer


Ss: Read and answer



T: Ask Ss to write down some words
T: Ask Ss to write down some words


related to means of transportation onrelated to means of transportation on


the board .the board .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON</i>:


What time does Hoang get up?
What time does Hoang get up?
What time does he go to school?
What time does he go to school?
How does he go to school?
How does he go to school?
What time does he have lunch?
What time does he have lunch?


Bike Motorbike Car Bike Motorbike Car


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Activity1:
T: Teach Vo.


T: Give two examples :


T: Give two examples :


T: Tell the difference between them.
T: Tell the difference between them.
T: Explain the structures and give
examples


Ss: Listen and copy down


Activity2:


T: Have Ss to ask and answer.
T: Have Ss to ask and answer.
Ss: Work in pair


Ss: Work in pair
Activity3:


T: Have Ss to ask and answer , looking
T: Have Ss to ask and answer , looking


at each picture in A 3at each picture in A 3
Ss: Work in pair


Ss: Work in pair


<b>A1: </b>


<b>A1: Listen and readListen and read</b>.<b> </b>.<b> </b>


_


_ rideride (v) : cưỡi ( ngựa, xe đạp) ( (v) : cưỡi ( ngựa, xe đạp) (<i>translation)translation</i>)
_


_ drivedrive ( v): lái ( xe máy , xe ô tô )( ( v): lái ( xe máy , xe ô tô )(<i> translation) translation)</i>
<i>_ </i>


<i>_ wait for</i>wait for<i> ( v): chờ, đợi (translation) ( v): chờ, đợi (translation)</i>
<i>_ </i>


<i>_ video game </i>video game (n):trò chơi điện tử ( (n):trò chơi điện tử ( <i>picturepicture</i>) )
1) Lan listens to music every evening .
1) Lan listens to music every evening .
2) Lan is listening to music .2) Lan is listening to music .


@


@ The present progressive tenseThe present progressive tense. .


S + am / is / are + S + am / is / are + V+ing …………V+ing …………


<i>Spelling</i>


<i>Spelling: </i>:


1- read 1- read  read readinging





2-2- writwritee  writ writinging ( bỏ “ ( bỏ “e”e” thêm “ thêm “ing”ing” ) )




3-3- swswimim  swim swimming ming ( nhân đôi phụ âm ( nhân đôi phụ âm


cuối rồi thêm “
cuối rồi thêm “ing”ing”) )
Uses


Uses: diễn tả hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc mình : diễn tả hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc mình
nói.


nói.


I am playing video games I am riding my bike
I am playing video games I am riding my bike<sub> </sub>


He is playing video games He is riding his bike
He is playing video games He is riding his bike
I am driving my car We are walking to school
I am driving my car We are walking to school<sub> </sub>


He is driving his car They are walking to
He is driving his car They are walking to
school



school


We are traveling to school by bus
We are traveling to school by bus


We are waiting We are waiting
for a train


for a train <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>


They are traveling to school They are waiting
They are traveling to school They are waiting
for a train


for a train


by bus by bus
<b>A2: </b>


<b>A2: Ask and answerAsk and answer ….</b> ….<b> </b>


a) What is he doing? He is
a) What is he doing? He is
……….


……….



b) What is she doing? She is
b) What is she doing? She is
………


………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


_ Ask Ss to read the dialogue again.
_ Ask Ss to read the dialogue again.
_ Asks s to translate into English
_ Asks s to translate into English
T: Correct if any.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>


_T: Remark the lesson and give
_T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


d) What are you doing? I am
d) What are you doing? I am
………..


………..
<b>A3: </b>



<b>A3: Answer. Then write</b><sub> </sub> <b>Answer. Then write … </b> …<b> </b>


a) What are you doing? c) What is he
a) What are you doing? c) What is he
doing?


doing?


I am doing my homework He is driving his car<sub> </sub>I am doing my homework He is driving his car


b) What is she doing? d) What are they
b) What is she doing? d) What are they
doing?


doing?


She is riding her bike They are waiting for a
She is riding her bike They are waiting for a
bus


bus




1) Tôi đang xem ti vi .1) Tôi đang xem ti vi .



2)Cô ấy đang đi đến bưu điện.2)Cô ấy đang đi đến bưu điện.


3) Chúng tôi đang chờ xe buýt.3) Chúng tôi đang chờ xe buýt.
Homework:


Homework:


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Do exercises 1,2 in workbook.
Do exercises 1,2 in workbook.


Prepare parts:A4,5,6 for next period.
Prepare parts:A4,5,6 for next period.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Week: 15


Week: 15 <sub>Date of preparation: 07/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 07/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 45 Date of teaching : 09/12/ 2016
Period: 45 Date of teaching : 09/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 2Lesson 2: What are you doing? (A4,6,7) : What are you doing? (A4,6,7) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>



<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to identify some activities of listen to identify some activities of
transports; understand short passages about Mr.Ha, Miss Hoa, Mr and Mrs.Vui
transports; understand short passages about Mr.Ha, Miss Hoa, Mr and Mrs.Vui
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : -ask and answer about activities of transports: who, where, how.


*the present progressive tense in questionative. “who …doing?”, where…
going?,


How… traveling?


b Vo: review: means of transports:by car, train, motorbike…
teach: a businessman, by plane.


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<i><b>V/ Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Let sts slap the board.
T: Let sts slap the board.



<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION:</i>:<i> </i>:<i> </i>


Activity1:


T:Teach vocabulary:
T:Teach vocabulary:


T: Explain how to do the exercise
T: Explain how to do the exercise


Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to Turn on the EZ Talk and ask Ss to
listen


listen


(twice)(twice)


Ss: Listen and number each picture
Ss: Listen and number each picture




SLAP THE BOARD!SLAP THE BOARD!<sub> </sub><sub> </sub> <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>






<b>A4: </b>


<b>A4: Listen and number the pictures…Listen and number the pictures…</b>
@


@ The present progressive tenseThe present progressive tense. .


S + am / is / are + S + am / is / are + V+ing ………… V+ing …………
_


_ businessmanbusinessman (n) : thương gia ( (n) : thương gia ( <i>translation )translation</i> )
_ station (n) : ga tàu


_ station (n) : ga tàu
_ downtown (n) :
_ downtown (n) :
_ fly: (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

T: Call on some Ss to give the answers
T: Call on some Ss to give the answers




T: Turn on the EZ Talk again.
T: Turn on the EZ Talk again.
Ss: Listen and correct



Ss: Listen and correct
T: Give the key answers
T: Give the key answers
(Tapescript:


(Tapescript:


1.Mr.Tam is a businessman. He’s
1.Mr.Tam is a businessman. He’s
driving home from work.


driving home from work.


2.Mrs.Thanh is waiting at the station.
2.Mrs.Thanh is waiting at the station.
The train is late and she is very angry.
The train is late and she is very angry.
3.Nam and Quang are going around the
3.Nam and Quang are going around the
city by motorbike.


city by motorbike.


4.Viet is a student. He is riding his bike
4.Viet is a student. He is riding his bike
to school.


to school.


5.Mai lives near her school. She’s


5.Mai lives near her school. She’s
walking home from school.


walking home from school.
6.The boy is waiting for the bus
6.The boy is waiting for the bus
downtown.)


downtown.)
Activity2:


T: Have Ss read the text again , then ask
T: Have Ss read the text again , then ask


and answer .and answer .


Ss: Work in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Work in pair to ask and answer
T: Call on some pairs to practice in front
T: Call on some pairs to practice in front


of the classof the class
Ss: Open pair work
Ss: Open pair work


T:Remind


Sts:pay attention



<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


_ Ask Ss to build a dialogue from the
_ Ask Ss to build a dialogue from the
text


text


_ Make five sentences , talking about
_ Make five sentences , talking about


where someone is going and how where someone is going and how


someone is traveling.someone is traveling.


<i>IV: </i>


<i>IV: HOME WORKHOME WORK</i>




a _ 4 b _ 1 c _ 5a _ 4 b _ 1 c _ 5<sub> </sub><sub> </sub> <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>




d _ 3 e _ 6 f _ 2d _ 3 e _ 6 f _ 2<sub> </sub><sub> </sub> <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>



<b>A6: </b>


<b>A6: Read. Then ask and answer Qs with: Who, Read. Then ask and answer Qs with: Who, </b>
<b>What, Where, How.</b>


<b>What, Where, How.</b>
Ex:


Ex: Who is that? That is Lan. Who is that? That is Lan.


What does she do? She is a student.What does she do? She is a student.


Where is she going? She is going to school.Where is she going? She is going to school.


How is she traveling? She is traveling by bike.How is she traveling? She is traveling by bike.


<i>a) Who is that ? That is Mr Ha.</i>


<i>a) Who is that ? That is Mr Ha.</i>


<i> </i>


<i> What does he do ? He is a businessman.What does he do ? He is a businessman.</i>
<i> </i>


<i> Where is he going? He is going to Ha Noi.Where is he going? He is going to Ha Noi.</i>
<i> </i>



<i> How is he traveling? He is traveling by How is he traveling? He is traveling by </i>
<i>plane.</i>


<i>plane.</i>


<i>b) Who is that ? That is Miss Hoa.</i>


<i>b) Who is that ? That is Miss Hoa.</i>


<i> </i>


<i> What does she do ? She is a teacher.What does she do ? She is a teacher.</i>
<i> </i>


<i> Where is she going? She is going to school.Where is she going? She is going to school.</i>
<i> </i>


<i> How is she traveling? He is traveling on foot.How is she traveling? He is traveling on foot.</i>
<i>c) Who are they ? They are Mr Tuan and Mrs </i>


<i>c) Who are they ? They are Mr Tuan and Mrs </i>


<i>Vui</i>


<i>Vui</i>


<i>What do they do ? They are doctors</i>


<i>What do they do ? They are doctors</i>



<i>Where are they going? They are going to the </i>


<i>Where are they going? They are going to the </i>


<i>hospital</i>


<i>hospital</i>


<i>How are they traveling? He are traveling by car.</i>


<i>How are they traveling? He are traveling by car.</i>
<b>A7.Remember</b>


<b>A7.Remember</b>


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Do exercises: 3,4 in workbook.
Do exercises: 3,4 in workbook.
Prepare parts: B1 for next period.
Prepare parts: B1 for next period.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

_T: Remark the lesson and give
_T: Remark the lesson and give


homework.


homework.
Week: 16


Week: 16 <sub>Date of preparation: 10/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 10/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 46 Date of teaching : 12/12/ 2016
Period: 46 Date of teaching : 12/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 3Lesson 3: A truck driver (B1) : A truck driver (B1) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>


<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the passage about activities
which Mr.Quang is doing; sts can practice much more the present progressive tense.
<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : review:


special questions with the present progressive tense: who, where, what
It’s five o’clock in the morning. Mr.Quang is going to a farm.


b Vo: a truck, a food stall, to load, to unload, to take…to


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures : </b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to put the sentences into their
T: Ask Ss to put the sentences into their


correct order to make a dialogue.correct order to make a dialogue.
Ss: Work in pairs .


Ss: Work in pairs .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATIONPRESENTATION</i>:<i> </i>:<i> </i>


T: Teach vocabulary:
T: Teach vocabulary:


Checking vocabulary: (


Checking vocabulary: ( <i>Slap the boardSlap the board )</i> )
T/F statement prediction : T/F statement prediction :



T: guide
T: guide


Ss: Work in groups
Ss: Work in groups


T: Ask Ss to read the text and check
T: Ask Ss to read the text and check
their


their


prediction . prediction .


T: Have Ss read the text again , then
T: Have Ss read the text again , then
ask


ask


and answer the questionsand answer the questions


(1) He is an engineer . (2)He is traveling by car.
(1) He is an engineer . (2)He is traveling by car.
(3) What does he do? (4)He is going to the (3) What does he do? (4)He is going to the
factory


factory



(5) Who is that ? (6)Where is he going ?
(5) Who is that ? (6)Where is he going ?
(7) That is Mr Long . (8)How is he traveling
(7) That is Mr Long . (8)How is he traveling
B1:


B1: Listen and read. Then ask …Listen and read. Then ask …
_ _ trucktruck (n): xe tải ( (n): xe tải (<i>picture ) picture</i> )
_


_ arrivearrive (v) : đến ( (v) : đến (<i>translation)translation)</i>


_ _ loadload (v) : chất hàng (v) : chất hàng<i> (translation ) (translation )</i><i> unload</i>unload


_ _ food stall: (n)cửa hàng ănfood stall: (n)cửa hàng ăn


<i>_ </i>


<i>_ farmer</i>farmer (n) : nông dân ( (n) : nông dân (<i>translation)translation)</i>


_ to take …to:_ to take …to: đưa … tới đưa … tới


1-Mr Quang is going to a factory .
1-Mr Quang is going to a factory .
2-A farmer is waiting for him.
2-A farmer is waiting for him.


3-They are loading the truck with vegetables .
3-They are loading the truck with vegetables .


4-He is taking the vegetables to the supermarket .
4-He is taking the vegetables to the supermarket .
1F, 2T , 3T , 4F


1F, 2T , 3T , 4F


a) He is a truck driver.
a) He is a truck driver.
b) He is going to a farmer
b) He is going to a farmer
c) A farmer is waiting for him
c) A farmer is waiting for him


d) He is taking the vegetables to the market in HN
d) He is taking the vegetables to the market in HN
e) He is eating his breakfast


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

Ss: Work in close pairs
Ss: Work in close pairs


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to perform
T: Call on some pairs of Ss to perform
in front of the class


in front of the class
Ss: Open pairs


Ss: Open pairs


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: Ask Ss to complete .
T: Ask Ss to complete .
Ss: Work in groups of three
Ss: Work in groups of three
T: Give feedback


T: Give feedback
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


f) He is eating at a foodstall
f) He is eating at a foodstall


Mr.Quang is a ………..
Mr.Quang is a ………..


He is ……….at the farm.
He is ……….at the farm.
He is ……….. the truck with
He is ……….. the truck with
vegetables.


vegetables.


He is eating ……….at 7 o’clock.


He is eating ……….at 7 o’clock.
*


*Homework:Homework:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Week: 16


Week: 16 <sub>Date of preparation: 12/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 12/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 47 Date of teaching : 14/12/ 2016
Period: 47 Date of teaching : 14/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 4Lesson 4: A truck driver (B2,4) : A truck driver (B2,4) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
I


I/ Objectives:


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue between Lan and
Ba; practice much more the present progressive tense with yes/no Qs.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Are you working? Yes, I am.
review: what are you doing?


b Vo: to copy, to correct, to say, a fly, a spider, to make a web.


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Point to pictures in part B1 and
T: Point to pictures in part B1 and
ask.


ask.


Ss: Answer.
Ss: Answer.
T: Correct if any.
T: Correct if any.


<i>II_PR</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:ESENTATION:</i>


Activity1:


T: Show the pictures and ask Ss
some questions ( Who is this ?)
( What is he doing ?)
Ss: Answer



T: Teach some new words.
T: Teach some new words.


T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat the
T: Ask Ss to listen and repeat the


sentences in the dialogue .sentences in the dialogue .
T: Ask Ss to read the dialogue
T: Ask Ss to read the dialogue
again.


again.


Ss: Play the roles of Lan and Ba .
Ss: Play the roles of Lan and Ba .


- What is Mr. Quang doing? (He is driving a car.)What is Mr. Quang doing? (He is driving a car.)
- Where is he going? (He is going to a farm)Where is he going? (He is going to a farm)
- What are you doing? (I am learning English)What are you doing? (I am learning English)



B2:


B2: Listen and repeat. Then answer…Listen and repeat. Then answer…





Lan:
Lan:
Ba:
Ba:
to copy:
to correct:
to say:
a fly:
a spider:


to make a web:


* Yes/No questions of the present progressive tense:
Tobe + S + V-ing . . . ?


Yes, S + tobe


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

T: Emphasize
T: Emphasize


T: Have Ss to ask and answer.
T: Have Ss to ask and answer.
Ss: Work in close pairs


Ss: Work in close pairs


T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
T: Call on some pairs of Ss to
perform in



perform in


front of the classfront of the class
Ss: Open pairs
Ss: Open pairs
Activity 2:


T:remind
T:remind


Sts:pay attention
Sts:pay attention


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>
T: Review the Vo and note.
T: Review the Vo and note.
Sts: Listen.


Sts: Listen.


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


b) Yes, he is


b) Yes, he is
c) No, he isn’t
c) No, he isn’t


d) He is playing soccer
d) He is playing soccer
e) No, they aren’t
e) No, they aren’t







*Homework:
*Homework:


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Do exercises: 2,3 in workbook.
Do exercises: 2,3 in workbook.
Prepare parts: C1,2 for next period.
Prepare parts: C1,2 for next period.
B4.Remember


B4.Remember


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

Week: 17


Week: 17 <sub>Date of preparation: 17/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 17/12/ 2016</sub>



Period: 48 Date of teaching : 19/12/ 2016
Period: 48 Date of teaching : 19/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>



<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 5Lesson 5: Road signs (C1,2) : Road signs (C1,2) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify and talk about some road signs with
“can” and “can’t”


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Give permission and make prohibitionGive permission and make prohibition :
You can park here.


You can’t turn right.


b Vo: can, cannot = can’t, one way, turn left/right, to park, go ahead, road signs.
<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: pairwork, individual work. pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>:


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>



<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Show some road signs and ask
T: Show some road signs and ask
Ss


Ss


to tell what they are .to tell what they are .


T: Ask Ss to guess the aim of the
T: Ask Ss to guess the aim of the


lesson.lesson.
T:


T: Tell the aim of the lesson : Tell the aim of the lesson :
giving


giving


permission and making permission and making
prohibition.


prohibition.



<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSON:NEW LESSON</i>:
Activity1:


T: Teach vocabulary:
T: Teach vocabulary:
Checking vocabulary:
Checking vocabulary:


(What and where)(What and where)
Open prediction :


Open prediction :


T: Ask Ss to look at the road signs
T: Ask Ss to look at the road signs


Read the statements and guess Read the statements and guess


what the signs saywhat the signs say
Ss: Read and predict
Ss: Read and predict





C1:


C1: Listen and read. Listen and read.
_


_ cancan (v) : có thể (v) : có thể
_


_ can’t = can notcan’t = can not : không thể ( : không thể ( <i>picture + example) picture + example</i>)
e.g: You


e.g: You cancan go to school by bike but you go to school by bike but you can’tcan’t go by go by
motorbike.


motorbike.
_


_ road signroad sign (n): biển báo giao thông ( (n): biển báo giao thông ( <i>picture) picture) </i>


_


_ parkpark (v):đỗ/đậu xe ( (v):đỗ/đậu xe ( <i>picture)picture)</i>


_


_ turn left/ rightturn left/ right (v) : rẽ trái/ phải( (v) : rẽ trái/ phải( <i>picture) picture) </i>


_ go


_ go aheadahead: đi thẳng về trước ( : đi thẳng về trước ( <i>picture)picture)</i>



_


_ difficultdifficult (adj) : khó khăn ( (adj) : khó khăn (<i>translation) translation) </i>


_


_ policemanpoliceman (n) : công an ( (n) : công an ( <i>picture)picture)</i>
_


_ go intogo into : đi vào ( : đi vào (<i>translation) translation) </i>


_


_ one wayone way : đường một chiều : đường một chiều
Open prediction :


Open prediction :


This sign says : This sign says:This sign says : This sign says:
A – You can park here A- You can’t turn rightA – You can park here A- You can’t turn right
B _ You can’t park here B- You can turn left.B _ You can’t park here B- You can turn left.
C _ You can turn left C- You can’t park hereC _ You can turn left C- You can’t park here
D - You can go ahead D –You can turn right.
D - You can go ahead D –You can turn right.




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

T: Ask Ss to listen to the
T: Ask Ss to listen to the


statements


statements


and check their prediction and check their prediction
T: Ask Ss to read C1 aloud.
T: Ask Ss to read C1 aloud.


Activity2:


T: Explain the grammar notes and
T: Explain the grammar notes and


present the structures of modal present the structures of modal
verb


verb


““ Can”, “cannot”Can”, “cannot”


Ss: Listen and copy down
Ss: Listen and copy down


T: Ask Ss to look at the road signs,
T: Ask Ss to look at the road signs,



read the sentences and thenread the sentences and then


complete htem with “can” or complete htem with “can” or


“can’t”“can’t”


Ss: Work in pairs
Ss: Work in pairs
T: give feed back.
T: give feed back.


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some
T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some
road


road

signs signs


T: Ask Ss to match the statements
T: Ask Ss to match the statements


with the road signs.with the road signs.
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>



T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.





A-You can’t go ahead A- You can’t ride a
A-You can’t go ahead A- You can’t ride a
motorbike.


motorbike.


B-You can ride a motorbike B – You can’t park here
B-You can ride a motorbike B – You can’t park here
C-You can go ahead. C- You can park here.
C-You can go ahead. C- You can park here.
D-You can turn left D-You can ride a motorbike.
D-You can turn left D-You can ride a motorbike.















A_ You can’t park here .A_ You can’t park here .


B_ You can’t go ahead .B_ You can’t go ahead .


C_ You can go into this street.C_ You can go into this street.


D_ You can’t go into this street.D_ You can’t go into this street.
@


@<i>Answer Key: 1A , 2B , 3C , 4A , 5DAnswer Key: </i>1A , 2B , 3C , 4A , 5D
C2:


C2: What do the road signs mean? …What do the road signs mean? …


@ Modal verbs: “Can”@ Modal verbs: “Can”


S + can + V-inf ……..S + can + V-inf ……..


S + can not + V-inf ……..S + can not + V-inf …….. can not = can’t can not = can’t


a) You can turn left b) You can’t turn right<sub> </sub>a) You can turn left b) You can’t turn right


c) You can go ahead d) You can’t ride a c) You can go ahead d) You can’t ride a
motorbike


motorbike<sub> </sub>




*Homework:
*Homework:


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Do exercise: 1 in workbook.
Do exercise: 1 in workbook.


Prepare parts: C3,4 for next period.
Prepare parts: C3,4 for next period.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

Week: 17


Week: 17 <sub>Date of preparation: 20/12/ 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 20/12/ 2016</sub>


Period: 49 Date of teaching : 22/12/ 2016
Period: 49 Date of teaching : 22/12/ 2016


<b>Unit 8</b>




<b>Unit 8</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>

<b>:OUT AND ABOUT</b>



<b> Lesson 6Lesson 6: Road signs (C3,4,5,6) : Road signs (C3,4,5,6) </b><i><b> </b><b> </b></i>
<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about some road signs through the
reading and the listening with “must” and “mustn’t”


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : Talk about an obligation and make prohibition.Talk about an obligation and make prohibition.
You must stop . _ You mustn’t go straight ahead
You must stop . _ You mustn’t go straight ahead


b Vo: must, mustn’t, look to the left/ right, dangerous, accident, warn, intersection, slow
down, discipline.


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, EZ Talk, chalks, pictures,
<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures</b>::


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask Ss to tell what the road signs


T: Ask Ss to tell what the road signs


below meanbelow mean
Ss: Answer
Ss: Answer


<i>II_PRESENTATION:</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:</i>
Activity1:


T: Set the situation .
T: Set the situation .


T:


T: Tell the aim of the lesson : Tell the aim of the lesson : talk talk
about


about


an obligation and make prohibitionan obligation and make prohibition


T: Teach vocabulary
T: Teach vocabulary


2_ Checking vocabulary:
2_ Checking vocabulary:




((<i>Slap the board)Slap the board</i>)






C3:


C3: Listen and read.<sub> </sub>Listen and read.


_ must (v) : phải


_ must (v) : phải <i>( picture + example)( picture + example</i>)
_


_ mustn’t mustn’t : không được : không được <i>( picture + example)( picture + example)</i>


_


_ roadroad (n) : con đường ( (n) : con đường ( <i>picture) picture) </i>


_


_ dangerousdangerous (adj): nguy hiểm (adj): nguy hiểm <i>(translation)(translation)</i>


_ a



_ accidentccident (n) : tai nạn (n) : tai nạn <i>(translation)(translation) </i>


_


_ warnwarn(v) : cảnh báo (v) : cảnh báo <i>(translation)(translation)</i>


_ Fast(adv) nhanh ≠
_ Fast(adv) nhanh ≠ slowslow
_ stop (v) :


_ stop (v) : dừng lại dừng lại <i>(translation)(translation)</i>


_ slow down


_ slow down (v) : đi chậm lại (v) : đi chậm lại <i>(translation) (translation)</i>


_ i


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

T: Ask Ss to read the text (C3)
T: Ask Ss to read the text (C3)
Ss:Have some sts read aloud.
Ss:Have some sts read aloud.
Activity2:


T: Explain the exercise


Show the pistures in C4 ask Ss to
look


at them and tell what they are


Ss: Look at the signs and answer.


T: Ask Ss to listen and number the
T: Ask Ss to listen and number the
road


road


signs as they hear . signs as they hear .


T: Ask Ss to match the road signs with
T: Ask Ss to match the road signs with


what they say. what they say.


Activity 3:
T:read
T:read
Sts:Repeat
Sts:Repeat


T: ask some sts to read aloud
T: ask some sts to read aloud
Activity 4:


T:Remind
T:Remind



Sts:pay attention
Sts:pay attention


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road
T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road


signs signs


T: Ask Ss to match the statements
T: Ask Ss to match the statements


with the road signs.with the road signs.
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson and give
T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


C4:


C4: Listen. Which sign? Number the …Listen. Which sign? Number the …


A b c
A b c <sub> </sub><sub> </sub> <sub> </sub><sub> </sub> <sub> </sub><sub> </sub>





d d e e ff




g g hh


1. You can’t turn right here. (c)
1. You can’t turn right here. (c)


2. There’s a stop sign. I must stop. (d)
2. There’s a stop sign. I must stop. (d)
3. You can park your car here. (h)
3. You can park your car here. (h)


4. You must slow down. There’s an intersection
4. You must slow down. There’s an intersection
ahead. (a)


ahead. (a)


5. You can enter that road. Look at the sign. (g)
5. You can enter that road. Look at the sign. (g)
6. We can turn left here. (b)


6. We can turn left here. (b)


7. You can’t ride motorbike on this street. (f)


7. You can’t ride motorbike on this street. (f)
C5.play with words


C5.play with words


C6.Remember:
C6.Remember:


Mr Quang drives a truck
Mr Quang drives a truck
He is driving it now
He is driving it now
You must slow down
You must slow down
You mustn’t go fast
You mustn’t go fast


*Homework:
*Homework:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

*******************************
*******************************
Week: 18


Week: 18 <sub>Date of preparation: 24 / 12 / 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 24 / 12 / 2016</sub>


Period: 50 Date of teaching : 26 / 12 / 2016
Period: 50 Date of teaching : 26 / 12 / 2016


<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>




<b>GRAMMAR PRACTICE</b>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review structures and some vo of unit 7 and
unit 8.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present progressive tense ,the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present progressive tense ,
the question words (


the question words (<i>Where , Who , What , When , How ), the prepositions of position , the Where , Who , What , When , How</i> ), the prepositions of position , the


modal verbs modal verbs <i>can , can’t , must , mustn’t.can , can’t , must , mustn’t.</i>
b Vo:


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures:</b>:


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
<i>I_WARM UP:</i>



T: Ask a st to look at the signs and read.
T: Ask a st to look at the signs and read.
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


T: Correct if any and give marks.
T: Correct if any and give marks.


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Review the simple present tense with
T: Review the simple present tense with


the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk” the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk”


with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means
of


of


travelling.travelling.



_ Notice the use of the tense: to express
_ Notice the use of the tense: to express
an


an


everyday action.everyday action.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
Ss: Work in pairs
Ss: Work in pairs
Activity2:


T: Review of formation:


T: Review of formation: I am + V-ingI am + V-ing


You, we, they.. are + V-ingYou, we, they.. are + V-ing


He, she … is + V-ing. He, she … is + V-ing.


And of use: To express an action And of use: To express an action


happening at the same time or around happening at the same time or around




the time as we are talking.the time as we are talking.
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
Ss: Work in pairs .


Ss: Work in pairs .


a.


a. You must turn left.You must turn left.
b.


b. You can park.You can park.
c.


c. You mustn’t ride a motorbike.You mustn’t ride a motorbike.


<b>1.</b>


<b>1.</b> Present simple tensePresent simple tense


with Wh- Qs ,Yes-No Qs and answers.with Wh- Qs ,Yes-No Qs and answers.
+ S + V (-s/es) . . .


+ S + V (-s/es) . . .


- S + don’t/ doesn’t + V-bare inf . . .


- S + don’t/ doesn’t + V-bare inf . . .
? (


? (Wh) do/ dWh) do/ does + S + + V-bare inf . . .oes + S + + V-bare inf . . .
Key:


Key: <i>a) How do you a) </i>How do you <i>gogo ?/ -I ?/ -</i>I <i>go to school by bus.go </i>to school by bus.
b.How does he


b.How does he <i>travel to Hanoi? -He travel</i> to Hanoi? -He <i>travels by travels</i> by
plane.


plane.
c.Do you


c.Do you <i>walk to school? No. I walk</i> to school? No. I <i>don’t walk to don’t walk</i> to
school.


school.
Does


Does she walkshe walk to school? – Yes. She to school? – Yes. She walkswalks t to o
school.


school.
<b>2.</b>


<b>2.</b> The The present progressive tense.present progressive tense.
I am/ you, we, they.. are + V-ingI am/ you, we, they.. are + V-ing



He, she … is + V-ing. He, she … is + V-ing.
Key:


Key: <i>a) Minh a) </i>Minh <i>is riding his bike. is riding</i> his bike.


b) They b) They <i>are waiting for a bus.are waiting</i> for a bus.


c) She c) She <i>is watching television. is watching</i> television.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

Activity3:


T: Have Sts look at the picture and ask
T: Have Sts look at the picture and ask


the Qs like this: the Qs like this:


““<i>What do you see in the pic?;What do you see in the pic?;</i>
<i> </i>


<i> What is the girl doing?; and the boy?What is the girl doing?; and the boy?</i>
<i>…..</i>


<i>…..</i>


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises
Ss: Work in pairs .


Ss: Work in pairs .
Activity4:


<i>T: </i>


<i>T: Ask sts read the list of words and </i>
give


their meanings.
a)


a)Asking about direction.Asking about direction.


b) Asking about a doer doing an action.
b) Asking about a doer doing an action.


(Doer as a subject.) (Doer as a subject.)


c) Asking about an object
c) Asking about an object
d)Asking about the time.


d)Asking about the time.
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
Ss: Work in pairs



Ss: Work in pairs
Activity5:


T:


T: Distinguish the differences again.
(Section 1 or grammar notes of C5, U.
8)


* So we use the


* So we use the present progressivepresent progressive
tense


tense with “now, at the moment, today with “now, at the moment, today
…”


…”


T: Ask Ss to do exercises
T: Ask Ss to do exercises
Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs
Activity6:


T: Review the forms and the uses of
T: Review the forms and the uses of
modal



modal


verbs “must “ verbs “must “ indicatesindicates an obligation an obligation


and and “mustn’t” “mustn’t” indicatesindicates anon- anon-
obligation.


obligation.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises with the pics.
T: Ask Ss to do exercises with the pics.
Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs
Activity7:


<i>“Can”</i>


<i>“Can” </i> to expressto express an ability an ability <i>to do sth. to do sth. </i>


and


and <i>“Can’t”, a non- ability.“Can’t”, </i> a non- ability.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises with the pics.
T: Ask Ss to do exercises with the pics.
Ss: Work in pairs



Ss: Work in pairs


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road
T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road
signs .


signs .




e) He e) He <i>is listening to music is listening</i> to music


f) They f) They <i>are walking to school.are walking</i> to school.


g) He g) He <i>is traveling to Hanoi.is traveling </i>to Hanoi.
<i><b>3.</b></i>


<i><b>3.</b></i> Prepositions :Prepositions :




 <i>Complete the exercise with the words in the Complete the exercise with the words in the </i>


<i>box.</i>



<i>box.</i>


In/ on/ at/ behind/ opposite /to the left of / to the
In/ on/ at/ behind/ opposite /to the left of / to the
right of / in front of / between……..ø


right of / in front of / between……..ø
Key:


Key: Look at the food store. A girl Look at the food store. A girl isis<i> in </i>in<i> </i> the store. A the store. A
boy is waiting


boy is waiting <i>in front of the store. There ….in front of </i>the store. There ….<i>behindbehind</i>
…/


…/<i> opposite opposite / to the left / to the right. / to the left / to the right.</i>


<b>4.</b>


<b>4.</b> Question words:Question words:


What where when …………
What where when …………
Key: a) Where


Key: a) Where is Lan going? – She is going is Lan going? – She is going to the to the
store.


store.



b) Who b) Who is waiting for Lan? –is waiting for Lan? –Nga Nga is waiting is waiting
for her


for her
c


c c) What c) What is Lan carrying? – She is carrying is Lan carrying? – She is carrying a a
bag.


bag.


<i>b)</i>


<i>b)</i> What What time is it? – It is twelve o’clock.time is it? – It is twelve o’clock.


<b>5.</b>


<b>5.</b> Contrast: Present simple and tense and Contrast: Present simple and tense and present present
progressive


progressive tense.tense.
Key: a)as an example:
Key: a)as an example:


--TheyThey <i>playplay..every day./They ..every day./</i>They <i>are playingare playing </i>
b) She


b) She ridesrides … / She … / She is ridingis riding ………now. ………now.


c We


c We gogo ………./ We ………./ We are going are going ….today. ….today.
d I


d I walk walk / I / I am going am going ……
e He


e He drivesdrives a truck. / He a truck. / He is drivingis driving …… at the …… at the
moment.


moment.
<b>6.</b>


<b>6.</b> “Must” and “Must not / mustn’t”“Must” and “Must not / mustn’t”
Key: a)


Key: a) YouYou must must slow down. / You slow down. / You mustn’tmustn’t go go
fast.


fast.


b)


b) You You must turn left. / You must turn left. / You mustn’tmustn’t go straight on. go straight on.


c)


c) Here you mustHere you must stop. / You stop. / You mustn’t mustn’t go straight go straight
on.



on.
7.


7. “Can” “Can” and “cannot / can’t”and “cannot / can’t”


<i>Key: </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

T: Ask Ss to match the statements
T: Ask Ss to match the statements


with the road signs.with the road signs.
<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


_Remark the lesson and give homework.
_Remark the lesson and give homework.


<i>can’t</i>


<i>can’t ride a ride amotorbike heremotorbike here</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


<i>*Homework:</i>


Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.
Week: 18



Week: 18 <sub>Date of preparation: 26 / 12 / 2016</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 26 / 12 / 2016</sub>


Period: 51 Date of teaching : 28 / 12 / 2016
Period: 51 Date of teaching : 28 / 12 / 2016


<b>REVISION</b>



<b>REVISION</b>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review their knowledge to prepare the next
examination.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : the simple present tense, the present progressive tense .the simple present tense, the present progressive tense .
b Vo:


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :</b>: groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.


<i><b>V/ Procedures</b>:<b> </b></i>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>


<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


@ Sets the situation .
@ Sets the situation .


T: Ask Ss to group the following
T: Ask Ss to group the following


words .words .
T:


T: Tell the aim of the lesson .Tell the aim of the lesson .


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION:PRESENTATION</i>:
Activity1:


T: Ask Ss to give the correct form
T: Ask Ss to give the correct form
of verbs.


of verbs.


Activity2:Activity2:


T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank in
T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank in



the passage with the correct the passage with the correct


preposition. preposition.
Ss: Work in groups
Ss: Work in groups


( goes , at , where , is going , plays , how , by , are
( goes , at , where , is going , plays , how , by , are
listening , what , for , am walking , who , walks )
listening , what , for , am walking , who , walks )
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct tense of the verbs.
I. Fill in the blanks with the correct tense of the verbs.


1-1- I ……….. to school by bike every day . ( go )I ……….. to school by bike every day . ( go )


2-2- She ………. television now . ( watch )She ………. television now . ( watch )


3-3- Thu ……… to school every morning . ( walk )Thu ……… to school every morning . ( walk )


4-4- They ………. for you in front of the post-office now.They ………. for you in front of the post-office now.
( wait )


( wait )



5-5- I ……… to Quinhon now . ( travel )I ……… to Quinhon now . ( travel )


6-6- Nam …………. television every evening . ( watch )Nam …………. television every evening . ( watch )


7-7- We ………. English every Tuesday and Friday. We ………. English every Tuesday and Friday.
(have)


(have)


8-8- My teacher ……… in the city . ( live )My teacher ……… in the city . ( live )


9-9- My father ………. in the garden now . ( work )My father ………. in the garden now . ( work )
#


# Answer Key<b>Answer Key : 1- go 2- is watching 3- walks </b> : 1- go 2- is watching 3- walks
4- are waiting 5- am traveling 6- watches 7- have 4- are waiting 5- am traveling 6- watches 7- have
8- lives 9- is working8- lives 9- is working


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

Activity3:


(Matching)(Matching)


A: Ask two groups to go to the
A: Ask two groups to go to the


board


board


and match the answers with theand match the answers with the


questions. For fives seconds, questions. For fives seconds,
any


any


group having the most number group having the most number
of


of


correct answers wins the game.correct answers wins the game.
Ss: Team work


Ss: Team work


Activity4:


(Matching)(Matching)



A: Ask two groups to go to the
A: Ask two groups to go to the
board


board


and match the answers with theand match the answers with the


questions. For fives seconds, questions. For fives seconds,
any


any


group having the most number group having the most number
of


of


correct answers wins the game.correct answers wins the game.
Ss: Team work


Ss: Team work


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


_ Ask Ss to review vocabulary and


structures for the first semester
exam


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


_T: Remark the lesson and give
_T: Remark the lesson and give
homework.


homework.


1_ Trang has breakfast ………..six .
1_ Trang has breakfast ………..six .
2_ My father goes …………work ………car .
2_ My father goes …………work ………car .
3_ We live ………the country .


3_ We live ………the country .


4_ I go ………bed ………9 o’clock .
4_ I go ………bed ………9 o’clock .
5_ There is a stadium in front ………..my school
5_ There is a stadium in front ………..my school
6_ I have literature ………..Tuesday and Friday .
6_ I have literature ………..Tuesday and Friday .
7_Thu lives …..Hai Ba Trung Street………Quinhon
7_Thu lives …..Hai Ba Trung Street………Quinhon
8_ Dung is waiting ………you ………..the classroom .
8_ Dung is waiting ………you ………..the classroom .
9_ There is a museum..…the movie theater and the park.


9_ There is a museum..…the movie theater and the park.
10_There is a flower garden …….the right of her house.
10_There is a flower garden …….the right of her house.


1.at 2.to - by 3.in 4.to-at 5. of1.at 2.to - by 3.in 4.to-at 5. of


6.on 7.on –in 8.for-in 9.between 10.to6.on 7.on –in 8.for-in 9.between 10.to
III.


III. MatchingMatching


1_ How does your father
1_ How does your father


go to work?go to work?


2_What are they doing ?
2_What are they doing ?
3_Where are you going ?
3_Where are you going ?
4_Who is waiting for Lan ?
4_Who is waiting for Lan ?
5_What time do you get up ?
5_What time do you get up ?
6_Does Dung go to school
6_Does Dung go to school



by bus? by bus?


7_What does Mr Minh do ?
7_What does Mr Minh do ?
8_Are they playing


8_Are they playing
football ?


football ?


9_How do you go to
9_How do you go to
school ?


school ?


a_Thu is waiting for
a_Thu is waiting for
Lan .


Lan .


b_He is an engineer .
b_He is an engineer .
c_I go to school on
c_I go to school on
foot .



foot .


d_They are doing their
d_They are doing their


homework.homework.
e_Yes , they are .
e_Yes , they are .
f_He goes to work by
f_He goes to work by


motorbike .motorbike .
g_I get up at five .
g_I get up at five .
h_I am going to the
h_I am going to the


stadium .stadium .


i_No , she doesn’t.
i_No , she doesn’t.
Key: 1-f, 2-d, 3-h, 4-a, 5-g, 6-I, 7-b, 8-e, 9-c.
Key: 1-f, 2-d, 3-h, 4-a, 5-g, 6-I, 7-b, 8-e, 9-c.
IV. Matching


IV. Matching



1_When does Lan have
1_When does Lan have
history?


history?


2_What time is it ?
2_What time is it ?
3_Where do they live ?
3_Where do they live ?
4_How old are you ?
4_How old are you ?
5_How many students
5_How many students
are there in your class?
are there in your class?
6_What do you do every
6_What do you do every
afternoon ?


afternoon ?


7_What is your name?
7_What is your name?
8_Which grade are you in
8_Which grade are you in
?


?



9_Is your house big ?
9_Is your house big ?


a_ There are forty .
a_ There are forty .
b_ I am in grade 6.
b_ I am in grade 6.
c_ She has it on
c_ She has it on
Thursday .
Thursday .


d_ No , it isn’t . It is
d_ No , it isn’t . It is
small.


small.


e_ It is quarter to seven .
e_ It is quarter to seven .
f_I am eleven .


f_I am eleven .


g_ They live in the city.
g_ They live in the city.
h_ I play volleyball.
h_ I play volleyball.
i _ My name is Trinh .
i _ My name is Trinh .


Key: 1-c, 2-e, 3-g, 4-f, 5-a, 6-h, 7-i , 8- b, 9 – d.
Key: 1-c, 2-e, 3-g, 4-f, 5-a, 6-h, 7-i , 8- b, 9 – d.


<i> </i>


<i> </i>
*


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

Learn the lesson carefully.
Learn the lesson carefully.


**************************


**************************


Week: 19


Week: 19 <sub>Date of preparation: 02 / 01 / 2017</sub><sub>Date of preparation: 02 / 01 / 2017</sub>


Period : 52 Date of teaching : 03 / 01 / 2017
Period : 52 Date of teaching : 03 / 01 / 2017


<b>REVISION (cont)</b>



<b>REVISION (cont)</b>



<b>I</b>


<b>I/ Objectives : </b>



By the end of the lesson, students continue to review their knowledge to prepare the next
examination.


<b>II/ Language contents:</b>


a. Grammar : the simple present tense, the present progressive tense .the simple present tense, the present progressive tense .
b Vo:


<b>III/ Teaching aids : </b> textbook, chalks, pictures,


<b>IV/ TT echniques echniques :: </b> groupwork, pairwork, individual work. groupwork, pairwork, individual work.
<b>V/ Procedures</b>::


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b>


<b>Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities</b> <b>ContentsContents</b>
I_WARM UP:


T: Give some Qs .
T: Give some Qs .
Sts: Answer.
Sts: Answer.


<i>II_PRESENTATION</i>


<i>II_PRESENTATION</i>::
Activity1:


T: Ask Ss to read the passage and
T: Ask Ss to read the passage and


answer the Qs.


answer the Qs.
Sts: Do as T’s ask.
Sts: Do as T’s ask.


1_ What is your name ?
1_ What is your name ?
2_ How old are you ?
2_ How old are you ?
3_ Where do you live ?
3_ Where do you live ?


4_ What time do you go school ?
4_ What time do you go school ?
5_ How do you go to school ?
5_ How do you go to school ?
6_ What do you do ?


6_ What do you do ?


7_ How many people are there in your family ?
7_ How many people are there in your family ?
I_ Read the passage and answer the questions:
I_ Read the passage and answer the questions:


This is my friend . Her name is Linh . She goes toThis is my friend . Her name is Linh . She goes to
school from Monday to Saturday.Her school is on
school from Monday to Saturday.Her school is on


Nguyen CaoThang Street and it is big. It has five floors,
Nguyen CaoThang Street and it is big. It has five floors,
Linh’ classroom is on the third floor . She is in grade 6,
Linh’ classroom is on the third floor . She is in grade 6,
class 6A. There are thirty-two students in her class.
class 6A. There are thirty-two students in her class.


Linh starts her classes at 2 o’clock in the afternoonLinh starts her classes at 2 o’clock in the afternoon
and finishes them at four thirty. On Monday she has
and finishes them at four thirty. On Monday she has
math, literature and English. After school Linh plays
math, literature and English. After school Linh plays
badminton , but her friend , Lien doesn’t play it; she
badminton , but her friend , Lien doesn’t play it; she
plays volleyball. Linh goes home at 5:30.


plays volleyball. Linh goes home at 5:30.


<i>Questions : </i>


<i>Questions : </i>


<i>1.</i>


<i>1.</i> <i>Where is Linh ‘s school ?Where is Linh ‘s school ?</i>
<i>2.</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>How many floors does her school have ?How many floors does her school have ?</i>
<i>3.</i>



<i>3.</i> <i>Which class is she in ?Which class is she in ?</i>


4.


4. <i>What time does she start her classes?What time does she start her classes?</i>


5.


5. <i>Does Lien play badminton ?Does Lien play badminton ?</i>
<i>Answers:</i>


<i>Answers:</i>
2.


2. Her school is on Nguyen CaoThang Street.Her school is on Nguyen CaoThang Street.
3.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

Activity2:


T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank in
T: Ask Ss to fill in the blank in


the passage with the correct the passage with the correct
words.


words.


Ss: Work in groups


Ss: Work in groups


Activity3:
T: Guide.
T: Guide.


Sts: Do as T’s ask.
Sts: Do as T’s ask.


T: Have sts give their answers.
T: Have sts give their answers.
T: Correct if any.


T: Correct if any.


Activity4:


(Matching)(Matching)


T: Ask two groups to go to the
T: Ask two groups to go to the
board


board


and match the answers with theand match the answers with the



questions. For fives seconds, questions. For fives seconds,
any


any


group having the most number group having the most number
of


of


correct answers wins the game.correct answers wins the game.
Ss: Team work


Ss: Team work


4.


4. She is in class 6A.She is in class 6A.
5.


5. She starts her classes at 2 o’clock in theShe starts her classes at 2 o’clock in the
afternoon.


afternoon.
6.


6. No, she doesn’t.No, she doesn’t.
II_ Fill in the blanks:



II_ Fill in the blanks:


behind beautiful country for behind beautiful country for


front left photo treesfront left photo trees


Dear Mai,Dear Mai,


Thank you _____your letter . I am in the _______Thank you _____your letter . I am in the _______
with my friend . She lives in a _______house. There is a
with my friend . She lives in a _______house. There is a
flower garden in ______of the house. There is a
flower garden in ______of the house. There is a
vegetable garden _______the house . To the _______of
vegetable garden _______the house . To the _______of
it there is a lake and to the right of it there are tall
it there is a lake and to the right of it there are tall
_______ . Here is_______of the house.


_______ . Here is_______of the house.


Key: for – country – beautiful – front-behind–left–trees
Key: for – country – beautiful – front-behind–left–trees
-photo



-photo


III_ Viết câu hỏi cho phần được gạch chân:
III_ Viết câu hỏi cho phần được gạch chân:


1.


1. Our friends are playing in the school yardOur friends are playing in the school yard . .
2.


2. Tan is studyingTan is studying in his room . in his room .
3.


3. It’s It’s ten to fiveten to five..
4.


4. Mr Nam goes to work by carMr Nam goes to work by car every day . every day .
5.


5. Linh is listening to musicLinh is listening to music at the moment. at the moment.
6.


6. Her brother is an engineerHer brother is an engineer. .
7.


7. Lan has history on ThursdayLan has history on Thursday..
8.


8. I get up at five o’clockI get up at five o’clock every day. every day.
9.



9. Hoa’s house has twoHoa’s house has two floors . floors .
10.


10. Phong lives in a small house in the countryPhong lives in a small house in the country..
Key:


Key:
1.


1. Where are your friends playing?Where are your friends playing?
2.


2. What is Tan doing in his room?What is Tan doing in his room?
3.


3. What time is it?What time is it?
4.


4. How does Mr Nam go to work every day?How does Mr Nam go to work every day?
5.


5. What is Linh doing at the moment?What is Linh doing at the moment?
6.


6. What does her brother do?What does her brother do?
7.


7. When does Lan have history?When does Lan have history?
8.



8. What time do you get up every day?What time do you get up every day?
9.


9. How many floors does Hoa’s house have?How many floors does Hoa’s house have?
10.


10.Where does Phong live?Where does Phong live?
IV. Matching:


IV. Matching:


1_When do you have history? a_ There are forty .
1_When do you have history? a_ There are forty .
2_ What time is it ? b_ I am in grade 6.
2_ What time is it ? b_ I am in grade 6.
3_Where do they live ? c_I have it on
3_Where do they live ? c_I have it on
Thursday .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


_ Ask Ss to review vocabulary and
structures for the first semester
exam


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


_T: Remark the lesson and ask sts
_T: Remark the lesson and ask sts


to learn the lesson carefully.


to learn the lesson carefully.


4_How old are you ? d_ No , it isn’t . It is
4_How old are you ? d_ No , it isn’t . It is
small.


small.


5_How many students are there e_ It is quarter to
5_How many students are there e_ It is quarter to
seven .


seven .


in your class?in your class?


6_ What do you do every afternoon ? f_I am eleven .
6_ What do you do every afternoon ? f_I am eleven .
7_ What is your name? g_ They live in
7_ What is your name? g_ They live in
the city.


the city.


8_ Which grade are you in ? h_ I play
8_ Which grade are you in ? h_ I play
volleyball.



volleyball.


9_ Is your house big ? i _ My name is
9_ Is your house big ? i _ My name is
Trinh .


Trinh .


Key: 1-c, 2-e, 3-g, 4-f, 5-a, 6-h, 7-I, 8-b, 9-d.
Key: 1-c, 2-e, 3-g, 4-f, 5-a, 6-h, 7-I, 8-b, 9-d.
<i>HOME WORK</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

Week: 18


Week: 18 Date of preparation: Dec 20Date of preparation: Dec 20thth<sub>, 2009</sub><sub>, 2009</sub>


Period: 52


Period: 52 Date of teaching: Dec 22Date of teaching: Dec 22ndnd<sub>, 2009</sub><sub>, 2009</sub>


REVISION (con’t)


REVISION (con’t)


1_


1_ ObjectivesObjectives: By the end of the lesson Ss : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able towill be able to::



To review the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present To review the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present


continuous tense , the question words (continuous tense , the question words (<i>Where,Wh ,What,When, HowWhere,Wh ,What,When, How</i>,,


<i>How many,How old ,What time,WhichHow many,How old ,What time,Which</i> ), the prepositions of time ), the prepositions of time


and position .and position .


2_ 2_ Language contentsLanguage contents::
@Vocabulary


@Vocabulary:: revision of vocabulary related to sports , family , job , revision of vocabulary related to sports , family , job ,


subjects , days of the week , places , means of transportation . subjects , days of the week , places , means of transportation .
3_


3_ Teaching aidsTeaching aids: handout: handout
4_


4_ ProceduresProcedures: :


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents



<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask some questions and call on Ss to


T: Ask some questions and call on Ss to




answer answer
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
Activity1:


T: Review the simple present tense with


T: Review the simple present tense with




the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk” the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk”


with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means of with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means of



travelling.travelling.


_ Notice the use of the tense: to express an


_ Notice the use of the tense: to express an




everyday action.everyday action.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs


Activity2:


T: Review of formation:


T: Review of formation: I am + V-ingI am + V-ing




You, we, they.. are + V-ingYou, we, they.. are + V-ing


He, she … is + V-ing. He, she … is + V-ing.




And of use: To express an action And of use: To express an action


happening at the same time or around happening at the same time or around


the time as we are talking.the time as we are talking.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


I _ Dùng từ /cụm từ gợi ý để viết đoạn văn


I _ Dùng từ /cụm từ gợi ý để viết đoạn văn




hoàn chỉnh : hoàn chỉnh :


<sub></sub><sub></sub>This / family . We / our living room . here / four people / This / family . We / our living room . here / four people /
my family. My father / engineer. My mother / nurse. My


my family. My father / engineer. My mother / nurse. My


sister and I / students . Our house / not big. It / beautiful .



sister and I / students . Our house / not big. It / beautiful .


Key: This is my family. We are in our livingroom. Here are


Key: This is my family. We are in our livingroom. Here are


four people in my family. My father is an engineer. My


four people in my family. My father is an engineer. My


mother is a nurse. My sister and I are students. Our house is


mother is a nurse. My sister and I are students. Our house is


not big. It is beautiful.


not big. It is beautiful.




<sub></sub><sub></sub>Nam / twelve years old. He / live / his mother / father / Nam / twelve years old. He / live / his mother / father /
two sisters / city. Her house / next / store . On the street /


two sisters / city. Her house / next / store . On the street /


there / restaurant/ bookstore/ temple . In the neighborhood /


there / restaurant/ bookstore/ temple . In the neighborhood /


there / hospital / factory . Nam’s father / work / factory . His



there / hospital / factory . Nam’s father / work / factory . His


mother / work / hospital .


mother / work / hospital .


Key: Nam is twelve years old. He lives with his mother,


Key: Nam is twelve years old. He lives with his mother,


father and two sisters in the city. Her house is next to a


father and two sisters in the city. Her house is next to a


store. On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a


store. On the street, there is a restaurant, a bookstore and a


temple. In the neighborhood, there is a hospital and a


temple. In the neighborhood, there is a hospital and a


factory. Nam’s father works in the factory. His mother


factory. Nam’s father works in the factory. His mother


works in the hospital.


works in the hospital.



II_ Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc :


II_ Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc :


1.


1. Nam ( go ) ....goes...to school on foot every day , Nam ( go ) ....goes...to school on foot every day ,
but today he ( ride ) …is riding……to school .


but today he ( ride ) …is riding……to school .


2.


2. I ( have ) ...have...literature on Monday.I ( have ) ...have...literature on Monday.
3.


3. My teacher ( live ) ...lives...in the city .My teacher ( live ) ...lives...in the city .
4.


4. They ( play ) ...are playing...soccer in the They ( play ) ...are playing...soccer in the
stadium at the moment .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs


Activity3:


<i>T: </i>



<i>T: </i> Ask sts read the list of words and give


their meanings.


d)


d)Asking about direction.Asking about direction.


b) Asking about a doer doing an action.


b) Asking about a doer doing an action.




(Doer as a subject.) (Doer as a subject.)


c) Asking about an object


c) Asking about an object


d)Asking about the time.


d)Asking about the time.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


Ss: Work in pairs



Ss: Work in pairs


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road


T: Ask Ss to demonstrate some road




signs signs


T: Ask Ss to match the statements


T: Ask Ss to match the statements




with the road signs.with the road signs.


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


T: Remark the lesson.


T: Remark the lesson.


5.


5. My school ( be ) ...is...small but beautiful.My school ( be ) ...is...small but beautiful.


6.


6. Every day , Trang ( get ) ...gets...up at five Every day , Trang ( get ) ...gets...up at five
o’clock .


o’clock .


7.


7. Dung ( watch ) ...watches...television every Dung ( watch ) ...watches...television every
evening.


evening.


III_ Hoàn thành mỗi chỗ trống bằng từ thích hợp :


III_ Hồn thành mỗi chỗ trống bằng từ thích hợp :






1.


1. ..How.... do they go to school every day ? _ By bus...How.... do they go to school every day ? _ By bus.


2.


2. My father is a teacher . ...He... goes to work by My father is a teacher . ...He... goes to work by
motorbike every week .



motorbike every week .


3.


3. Mr Minh ...works... in a hospital .Mr Minh ...works... in a hospital .


4.


4. There is a hotel between the museum ...and...theThere is a hotel between the museum ...and...the
movie theater.


movie theater.


5.


5. She is ...listening... to music now .She is ...listening... to music now .


6.


6. Hoa is ...in... grade 7.Hoa is ...in... grade 7.


7.


7. We have ...English... and math on Tuesday .We have ...English... and math on Tuesday .


8.


8. Is your house big ? _ Yes , ....it... is .Is your house big ? _ Yes , ....it... is .



9.


9. There ....is... a river in my village .There ....is... a river in my village .


10. I ...am... a student .10. I ...am... a student .
*


*Homework:Homework:


Review the lesson carefully for the first term test.


Review the lesson carefully for the first term test.


****************************************************************************************


****************************************************************************************


Week: 19


Week: 19 Date of preparation: Dec 22Date of preparation: Dec 22ndnd<sub>, 2009</sub><sub>, 2009</sub>


Period: 53


Period: 53 Date of teaching: Dec 28Date of teaching: Dec 28thth<sub>, 2009</sub><sub>, 2009</sub>


REVISION (Con’t)


REVISION (Con’t)



1_


1_ ObjectivesObjectives: By the end of the lesson Ss : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able towill be able to::


To review the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present To review the simple present tense of the ordinary verb, the present


continuous tense , the question words (continuous tense , the question words (<i>Where,Wh ,What,When, HowWhere,Wh ,What,When, How</i>,,


<i>How many,How old ,What time,WhichHow many,How old ,What time,Which</i> ), the prepositions of time ), the prepositions of time


and position .and position .


2_ 2_ Language contentsLanguage contents::
@Vocabulary


@Vocabulary:: revision of vocabulary related to sports , family , job , revision of vocabulary related to sports , family , job ,


subjects , days of the week , places , means of transportation . subjects , days of the week , places , means of transportation .
3_


3_ Teaching aidsTeaching aids: handout: handout
4_


4_ ProceduresProcedures: :



Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities


Teacher ’ s / students ’ activities ContentsContents


<i>I_WARM UP:</i>


T: Ask some questions and call on Ss to


T: Ask some questions and call on Ss to




answer answer
Ss: Answer


Ss: Answer


<i>II_</i>


<i>II_NEW LESSONNEW LESSON</i>::
Activity1:


T: Review the simple present tense with


T: Review the simple present tense with




the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk” the verbs “Go”, “ Travel”, “Walk”




with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means of with Word-Q. “ How” to ask means of




 MatchingMatching




 Supply the correct form of verbsSupply the correct form of verbs


 ReadingReading


I.


I. Remember:Remember:


<i>1)</i>


<i>1)</i>


Play


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>



travelling.travelling.


_ Notice the use of the tense: to express an



_ Notice the use of the tense: to express an




everyday action.everyday action.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs


Activity2:


T: Review of formation:


T: Review of formation: I am + V-ingI am + V-ing




You, we, they.. are + V-ingYou, we, they.. are + V-ing


He, she … is + V-ing. He, she … is + V-ing.


And of use: To express an action And of use: To express an action




happening at the same time or around happening at the same time or around


the time as we are talking.the time as we are talking.


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


T: Ask Ss to do exercises


Ss: Work in pairs


Ss: Work in pairs


<i>III_ CONSOLIDATION </i>


T: consolidate grammar notes.


T: consolidate grammar notes.


<i>IV: HOME WORK</i>


_T: Remark the lesson.


_T: Remark the lesson.


Volleyball / badminton/


Volleyball / badminton/



Wait for a bus/ a train / a friend
Wait for a bus/ a train / a friend


Do


Do


Have / eat


Have / eat Homework / housework /


Homework / housework /


Breakfast / lunch / dinner


Breakfast / lunch / dinner


Listen to music


Listen to music Ride a bike / motorbikeRide a bike / motorbike


Brush teeth


Brush teeth Drive a carDrive a car


Wash face


Wash face Go home / to work/ to school / to bedGo home / to work/ to school / to bed



Watch television


Watch television Get up / dressedGet up / dressed


2)


2)


ON


ON ININ


A street / a table /


A street / a table /


Monday


Monday A house/ the city/ a room/


A house/ the city/ a room/


A village/the country/ the town


A village/the country/ the town


II- Supply the correct form of verbs:


II- Supply the correct form of verbs:





1-1- You and I (be )………are……… good friends.You and I (be )………are……… good friends.




2-2- Every morning, Lan …gets…… up at five (get )Every morning, Lan …gets…… up at five (get )




3-3- He …brushes…… his teeth every morning. (brush )He …brushes…… his teeth every morning. (brush )




4-4- An and her sister …go……… to school by bike. (go )An and her sister …go……… to school by bike. (go )




5-5- My father ……watches…… TV every nighht (watch )My father ……watches…… TV every nighht (watch )




6-6- We …are going………… to school by bike (go )We …are going………… to school by bike (go )




7-7- He…doesn’t go……… to school on Sunday ( not/ go)He…doesn’t go……… to school on Sunday ( not/ go)





8-8- There ……are……… many trees near my house (be)There ……are……… many trees near my house (be)




9-9- …Do…you ……go………… to school on foot ? (go )…Do…you ……go………… to school on foot ? (go )




10-10- My mother ……has………… lunch at work ( have )My mother ……has………… lunch at work ( have )


*


*Homework:Homework:


Review the lesson carefully for the first term test.


Review the lesson carefully for the first term test.


Week: 19 _ Period: 54


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

Date of teaching:


Date of teaching: Wednesday,Dec 24th, Wednesday,Dec 24th,<i>20082008</i>


PHONG GD KRONG-BUK ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I


PHONG GD KRONG-BUK ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I


TRUONG THCS LY TU TRONG



TRUONG THCS LY TU TRONG M MÔN: TIẾNG ANH ( 45 PHÚT)ÔN: TIẾNG ANH ( 45 PHÚT)


A.


A. READING: Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời các câu hỏi : (3đ)READING: Em hãy đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời các câu hỏi : (3đ)
Hi, my name is Tuan. I


Hi, my name is Tuan. I’’<sub>m a student. I get up at half past five. I go to school at half past six. The school is near</sub><sub>m a student. I get up at half past five. I go to school at half past six. The school is near</sub>


my house, so I walk. Classes start at seven and end at eleven fifteen. I walk home and have lunch at twelve


my house, so I walk. Classes start at seven and end at eleven fifteen. I walk home and have lunch at twelve


o


o’’<sub>clock.</sub><sub>clock.</sub>


Questions :


Questions :


a. What does Tuan do ?


a. What does Tuan do ? <sub></sub> ………<sub></sub> ………


b.


b. What time does Tuan get up ? What time does Tuan get up ? <sub></sub><sub></sub> ……….. .. . . ……….. .. . .


c. What time does he go to school ?



c. What time does he go to school ? <sub></sub><sub></sub> . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . ..


d. Does he go to school by car ?


d. Does he go to school by car ? <sub></sub> .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. … . . . <sub></sub> .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. … . . .
e. What time do classes start ?


e. What time do classes start ? <sub></sub><sub></sub> . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .


f. Does he walk home


f. Does he walk home <sub></sub><sub></sub> . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . ... .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . ... .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. ..


B. WRITING:Em hãy dùng từ gợi ý sau để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh.


B. WRITING:Em hãy dùng từ gợi ý sau để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh.




Câu 0 là ví dụ (3đ)Câu 0 là ví dụ (3đ)


0. Hoa / be / a student .


0. Hoa / be / a student . <sub></sub> Hoa is a student .<sub></sub> Hoa is a student .


1. She / go / school / foot / everyday . 1. She / go / school / foot / everyday . <sub></sub> ………… ………<sub></sub> ………… ………





2. Her father / be / a businessman . 2. Her father / be / a businessman . <sub></sub><sub></sub> ………..….. ………..…..




3. He / travel / Hanoi / plane . 3. He / travel / Hanoi / plane . <sub></sub> ……….<sub></sub> ……….


4. Her mother / be / a doctor . 4. Her mother / be / a doctor . <sub></sub> ………<sub></sub> ………




5. She / work / a hospital . 5. She / work / a hospital . <sub></sub> ………<sub></sub> ………


6. She / go / work / motorbike . 6. She / go / work / motorbike . <sub></sub><sub></sub> ……….. ………..


C. LANGUAGE FOCUS:


C. LANGUAGE FOCUS:




I. Chia động từ trong dấu ngoặc đơn ở hình thức đúng.I. Chia động từ trong dấu ngoặc đơn ở hình thức đúng.


Câu 0 là câu ví dụ (2,5đ)Câu 0 là câu ví dụ (2,5đ)





0) She0) She is is (be) a student(be) a student


1) Ba ………. (watch) television every evening .


1) Ba ………. (watch) television every evening .


2) There ……… (be) trees and flowers in the park .


2) There ……… (be) trees and flowers in the park .




3) I ………… ….. (listen) to music every evening.3) I ………… ….. (listen) to music every evening.


4) Mr Hai ……….. (drive) to work now.4) Mr Hai ……….. (drive) to work now.


5) They ……….. (wait) for a bus at the moment.5) They ……….. (wait) for a bus at the moment.


II. Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn chỉnh .II. Sắp xếp các từ dưới đây thành câu hoàn chỉnh .


Câu 0 là ví dụ (0,75đ)Câu 0 là ví dụ (0,75đ)




0. name / her / Lan / is 0. name / her / Lan / is <sub></sub> Her name is Lan <sub></sub> Her name is Lan



1. Miss Lan / does / work / to / travel / how / ? . (By train)1. Miss Lan / does / work / to / travel / how / ? . (By train)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

2. is / river / there / a / my / near / house / .


2. is / river / there / a / my / near / house / .




……….


……….


3.


3. travels / to / Ha Noi / he / train / by.travels / to / Ha Noi / he / train / by.




……….


……….




III.Mỗi câu dưới đây có một lỗi sai. Em hãy tìm ra lỗi sai gạch dưới III.Mỗi câu dưới đây có một lỗi sai. Em hãy tìm ra lỗi sai gạch dưới


lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng. Câu 0 là câu ví dụ (0,75điểm)lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng. Câu 0 là câu ví dụ (0,75điểm)


0. There are forty


0. There are forty studentstudent in my class. in my class.




studentsstudents


1


1 What time do Hoa have breakfast? What time do Hoa have breakfast?


<sub></sub><sub></sub>...


2


2 Nga gets up on 6 o’clock.Nga gets up on 6 o’clock.


<sub></sub><sub></sub>...


3


3 He are a student.He are a student.


</div>

<!--links-->

×